Cisco TelePresence MX800 Guide

Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.5
SEPTEMBER 2018
Administrator guide
for Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
1
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Table of contents
Thank you for choosing Cisco!
Your Cisco product has been designed to give you many
years of safe, reliable operation.
Introduction........................................................................................................................ 4
User documentation and software........................................................................................ 5
What’s new in CE9................................................................................................................. 6
MX700 and MX800 at a glance........................................................................................... 21
Power On and Off................................................................................................................ 27
LED indicators...................................................................................................................... 28
How to administer the video system.................................................................................... 31
This part of the product documentation is aimed at
administrators working with the setup and configuration of
the video system.
Our main objective with this Administrator guide is to
address your goals and needs. Please let us know how
well we succeeded!
Configuration................................................................................................................... 35
User administration.............................................................................................................. 36
Change the system passphrase.......................................................................................... 37
Restrict the access to the Settings menu............................................................................ 38
System configuration........................................................................................................... 39
Add a sign in banner............................................................................................................ 40
Add a welcome banner.........................................................................................................41
Manage the service certificates of the video system.......................................................... 42
Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)....................................................... 43
Set up secure audit logging................................................................................................. 44
Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning......................... 45
Delete CUCM trust lists....................................................................................................... 46
Change the persistency mode............................................................................................ 47
Set strong security mode.................................................................................................... 48
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing................................................................... 49
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio.............................................................................. 54
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface.................................. 56
Add a custom wallpaper...................................................................................................... 58
Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume................................................................. 59
Manage the Favorites list..................................................................................................... 60
Set up accessibility features................................................................................................ 61
May we recommend that you visit the Cisco web site
regularly for updated versions of this guide.
The user documentation can be found on
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
How to use this guide
The top menu bar and the entries in the Table of contents
are all hyperlinks. You can click on them to go to the topic.
Peripherals....................................................................................................................... 62
Connect input sources......................................................................................................... 66
Extend the number of input sources.................................................................................... 68
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature......................................................................................... 69
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature............................................................................... 71
Set up the PresenterTrack feature........................................................................................74
Briefing room set-up............................................................................................................ 79
Classroom set-up................................................................................................................ 85
Test the loudspeaker connections....................................................................................... 90
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
2
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Security settings.................................................................................................................172
SerialPort settings...............................................................................................................175
SIP settings.........................................................................................................................176
Standby settings................................................................................................................ 180
SystemUnit settings........................................................................................................... 182
Time settings..................................................................................................................... 183
UserInterface settings........................................................................................................ 187
UserManagement settings................................................................................................. 190
Video settings.................................................................................................................... 192
Experimental settings........................................................................................................ 202
Using extra loudspeakers and local reinforcement............................................................. 92
Connect the Touch 10 controller......................................................................................... 93
Connect the ISDN Link......................................................................................................... 97
Maintenance.................................................................................................................... 98
Upgrade the system software............................................................................................. 99
Add option keys..................................................................................................................101
System status.................................................................................................................... 102
Run diagnostics.................................................................................................................. 103
Download log files.............................................................................................................. 104
Create a remote support user........................................................................................... 105
Backup and restore configurations and custom elements................................................ 106
CUCM provisioning of custom elements........................................................................... 107
TMS provisioning of custom elements............................................................................... 108
Revert to the previously used software image.................................................................. 109
Factory reset the video system..........................................................................................110
Factory reset Cisco Touch 10.............................................................................................113
Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10......................................................................114
Capture user interface screenshots...................................................................................115
Appendices.................................................................................................................... 203
How to use Touch 10......................................................................................................... 204
Set up remote monitoring.................................................................................................. 205
Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface......................... 206
Place a call using the web interface.................................................................................. 207
Share content using the web interface.............................................................................. 209
Local layout control.............................................................................................................210
Control a local camera........................................................................................................211
Control a far end camera....................................................................................................212
Packet loss resilience - ClearPath......................................................................................213
Room analytics....................................................................................................................214
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface.....................................................215
Customize the video system's behavior using macros ......................................................217
Input source composition...................................................................................................218
Presentation source composition...................................................................................... 220
Manage startup scripts...................................................................................................... 222
Access the video system’s XML files ............................................................................... 223
Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface ............................... 224
Notes regarding screen technology.................................................................................. 225
GPIO interface.................................................................................................................... 226
Serial interface................................................................................................................... 227
Open TCP Ports................................................................................................................. 228
Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS.................................................................. 229
Technical specification....................................................................................................... 230
Supported RFCs................................................................................................................ 234
User documentation on the Cisco web site....................................................................... 235
Cisco contacts................................................................................................................... 236
System settings..............................................................................................................116
Overview of the system settings........................................................................................117
Audio settings.................................................................................................................... 123
CallHistory settings............................................................................................................ 130
Cameras settings................................................................................................................131
Conference settings.......................................................................................................... 137
FacilityService settings.......................................................................................................142
GPIO settings..................................................................................................................... 143
H323 settings..................................................................................................................... 144
Logging settings.................................................................................................................147
Macros settings................................................................................................................. 148
Network settings................................................................................................................ 149
NetworkServices settings.................................................................................................. 156
Peripherals settings........................................................................................................... 162
Phonebook settings........................................................................................................... 164
Provisioning settings.......................................................................................................... 165
Proximity settings.............................................................................................................. 168
RoomAnalytics settings..................................................................................................... 169
RoomReset settings............................................................................................................170
RTP settings........................................................................................................................171
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System settings
3
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 1
Introduction
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
4
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
User documentation and software
Products covered in this guide
•
Cisco TelePresence MX700 with single camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Single with single camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Single with dual camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Dual
User documentation
Software
This guide provides you with the information required to
administrate the video system.
Download software for the endpoint from the Cisco web
site:
The guide primarilly addresses capabilities and
configurations of on-premise registered video systems
(CUCM, VCS), but a sub-set of the capabilities and
configurations also applies to devices that are registered
to our cloud service (Cisco Webex).
Refer to the ► User documentation on the Cisco web site
appendix for more information about the guides for this
product.
Documentation on the Cisco web site
Visit the Cisco web site regularly for updated versions of
the guides:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
Documentation for cloud registered devices
► https://software.cisco.com/download/home
We recommend reading the Software release notes
(CE9):
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/
collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsdproducts-support-series-home.html
Converting to CE software
Before upgrading from TC software to CE software,
it is important to consider the upgrade requirements;
otherwise upgrading to CE software can leave you
with a non-functional deployment that requires you to
downgrade.
Refer to the software release notes, and the
► Upgrade the system software chapter.
For more information on Cisco Webex room devices, visit:
► https://collaborationhelp.cisco.com
Cisco Project Workplace
Explore the Cisco Project Workplace to find inspiration
and guidelines when preparing an office or meeting room
for video conferencing:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/projectworkplace
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
5
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
What’s new in CE9
This chapter provides an overview of the new and changed
system settings, and the new features and improvements in
the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9 (CE9)
compared to CE8.
New features and improvements in CE9.5
Presentation source composition
Support for Korean keyboard
For more details, we recommend reading the Software
release notes:
With using two or more content sources and sending
them as one image, you can create a new experience
for sharing in meetings.
Korean keyboard input is supported on Touch 10
when the user interface language is set to Korean.
This gives users more flexibility with what they
present to remote sites. You can configure the
presentation composition through in-room controls
together with macros or an external controller.
Welcome banner
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaborationendpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsd-products-supportseries-home.html
The maximum number of different sources is
determined by the device in use:
•
MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Room Kit, and SX20: two
sources
•
Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, and Room Kit
Plus: three sources
•
MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2, Room Kit Pro, and
SX80: four sources
You can set up a welcome banner that users see after
they sign in to the video system's web interface or
command line interface. The banner can for example
contain information you need in order to get started,
or things you must be aware of when setting up the
system.
You can only compose content that has been shared
through a cable.
Classroom set-up
The Classroom template uses macros to tailor a room
set-up that works well for presenting and teaching
scenarios. The template provides easy setup,
management, and use of the room.
The Classroom set-up works similarly to the Briefing
Room set-up, but it doesn’t require three screens.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
6
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.4
Rebranding from Cisco Spark to Cisco Webex
Cisco Spark has changed its name to Cisco Webex, and
the user interface elements that displayed Spark are
changed to Webex. In the activation flow you now see
Cisco Webex as a registration option instead of Cisco
Spark.
The following products have gotten new names:
•
Cisco Spark Room Kit is now Cisco Webex Room Kit
•
Cisco Spark Room Kit Plus is now Cisco Webex Room
Kit Plus
•
Cisco Spark Codec Plus is now Cisco Webex Codec
Plus
•
Cisco Spark Quad Camera is now Cisco Quad
Camera
•
Cisco Spark Room 55 are now Cisco Webex Room 55
•
Cisco Spark Room 70 are now Cisco Webex Room 70
•
Cisco DX70 is now Cisco Webex DX70
•
Cisco DX80 is now Cisco Webex DX80
CUCM provisioning of the admin settings
lockdown configuration
The admin settings lockdown configuration, that was
introduced in CE9.2.1, can now be provisioned from
CUCM. You can lock a selection of the settings on the
settings menu on all of your devices simultaneously when
you configure them through CUCM.
Changed default HTTP mode from
HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS
The default value of NetworkServices HTTP Mode
is changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS. This is to
increase the security of the room devices on default
configuration. Upgrading from earlier software versions
will not automatically change the default value and it will
stay on HTTP+HTTPS to avoid breaking current HTTP
implementations.
The change is seen on new systems running CE9.4.0
or later, or if the device is factory reset on CE9.4.0. The
HTTP requests are redirect to HTTPS and on the first
visit to the device’s web interface, the device displays
an “Insecure connection warning”. To proceed to the
web interface, you need to create an exception in your
browser. This is a one-time operation unless you access
the web interface with a different browser that has never
visited the device web interface or if the device is factory
reset.
In-Room Control update
You can add buttons for as many panels as you want on
the home screen as well as on the in-call screen of the
user interface.
Your CUCM may require a new device package in order to
expose the new fields for this configuration.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
7
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.3
Backup and restore settings and custom
elements
You can include custom elements as well as
configurations in a backup file bundle (zip). You can
choose which of the following elements to include in the
bundle:
•
Branding images
•
Macros
•
Favorites
•
Sign-in banner
•
In-room control panels
•
Configurations (all or a sub-set)
In previous software versions, you could only backup the
configurations.
The backup file can either be restored manually from
the video system’s web interface, or you can generalize
the backup bundle so that it can be provisioned across
multiple video systems, for example using Cisco UCM or
TMS.
Provisioning of custom elements
In-Room Control updates
The backup bundle, as described above, can be
provisioned to many video systems using Cisco UCM or
TMS. It is important that device specific information is
removed when creating a backup bundle intended for
multiple video systems. If you include device specific
information in such a bundle, you may end up with
multiple video systems that cannot be reached.
The following functionality is added to the in-room control
feature:
By provisioning a non-system specific backup bundle,
you can for example, copy a video system’s setup with
macros, branding elements, and in-room control panels
across multiple video systems.
•
You can add buttons for up to 20 panels in total. The
buttons appear on the home screen or the in-call
screen of the user interface depending on the panel
type.
•
As before, there are three types of in-room control
panels: global panels (always available), in-call panels
(available only when in call), and out-of-call panels
(only available when not in a call). The entry point for
the global panel has been removed from the status
bar (top right corner of the user interface). Buttons
to open global panels are added to both the home
screen and the in-call screen instead, together with
the buttons for the out-of-call only and in-call only
panels, respectively.
•
You can make standalone trigger-buttons, which are
buttons that trigger an event directly, without opening
a panel on the user interface.
Currently, provisioning via Cisco UCM will not restore any
configurations, only the other custom elements; TMS will
restore everything that is included in the backup bundle.
See the release note for more details about provisioning.
Also the following features are added in the in-room
control editor:
You will find the backup and restore functionality under
Maintenance > Backup and Restore on the video system’s
web interface.
•
Some new icons are available.
•
A set of colors to choose from for the in-room-control
buttons.
•
Double click text elements to edit text directly.
•
Drag and drop in-room control XML files into the
editor.
For a full description of in-room controls, see the in-room
control / customization guide on ► https://www.cisco.
com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
8
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Support for ISDN Link
Resume a postponed upgrade
Accessibility: Flashing screen on incoming calls
ISDN Link with software version IL1.1.7 is supported for all
video systems that supports CE9.3.0.
As before, when using automatic pairing (which allows
the ISDN Link to be automatically discovered by the video
system) IPv6 must be enabled on the video system.
When you get a notification about software upgrade, you
can choose Upgrade now or Postpone. If you postpone
the upgrade, you can resume the upgrade from the
Settings > About this device menu on the user interface
when you are ready; you don’t have to wait for 6 hours
like you had to before.
You can configure the video system so that the screen
and Touch controller flashes red / light grey when the
system receives an incoming call. This feature is mainly
targeting hearing impaired users, making it easier for
them to notice an incoming call.
One Button to Push snooze
If you don’t manually resume the upgrade, the upgrade
will start automatically after 6 hours.
You are able to snooze an One Button to Push (OBTP)
meeting reminder for 5 minutes. The snooze time cannot
be changed. The reminder typically appears if you are in
a call and a scheduled meeting is about to start. You can
snooze the reminder for 5 minutes each time it appears
until the meeting has ended.
Adjust the call rate before making a call
As soon as you start typing in the Search or dial field, you
can open a dialog and select a custom call rate. In earlier
releases this was available only when selecting an entry
from the Directory.
If you don’t select a custom call rate, you get the rate set
in the Conference DefaultCall Rate setting.
Prevent system information from being
exposed in the user interface
You can prevent important system information from being
exposed in the user interface, for example:
•
•
•
•
You can select a ring-tone and adjust the ring-tone
volume from the settings menu on the user interface.
In the previous releases this was done from the web
interface.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
One common API guide
We have gathered all API information in one API guide,
that covers all products. This is in contrast to earlier
releases were we have had one API guide per product.
IP addresses (video system, touch controller, UCM/
VCS registrar)
MAC address
Serial number
Software version
To enable this feature the following must be done:
•
•
Select ring-tone and adjust ring-tone volume
The feature is disabled by default, and must be enabled
by the Accessibility IncomingCallNotification setting.
•
A passphrase must be set for all users with
administrator rights
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode must be set to
Locked
UserInterface Security Mode must be set to Strong
This feature also means that the IP address is not
displayed on the screen when you disconnect a Touch
controller.
9
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.2
Macro framework
Source composition
Support for the Snap to Whiteboard feature
The macro framework allows users and integrators to
write JavaScript macros in order to automate scenarios
and customize endpoint behavior so that it suites an
individual customer’s requirements.
You can compose up to four input sources (depending on
how many input sources are available on the codec) into
one image. This is the image that will be sent in the main
video stream to the far end in a call. Source composition
can only be enabled via the API, so we recommend
creating a user interface extension combined with a
macro to control the compositions on demand.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is now available for
all products that have a camera with speaker track
functionality: SX80 with Cisco TelePresence Speaker
Track 60 camera or Cisco Spark Quad camera, MX700/
MX800 with dual camera, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, Room
55 and Room 70.
The combination of macros and powerful features such as
listening for events/status changes, automating execution
of commands and configurations, and providing local
control functionality for the In-Room control feature,
provides many possibilities for custom setups.
Minor behavioral changes, such as having the video
system in Do Not Disturb for an infinite amount of time,
can be easily realized by macros. Some other examples
are: Reset configurations automatically, make a call at a
certain time of the day, and issue alert or help messages
depending on status changes.
The macro editor, which also provides several example
macros, is available from the video system’s web
interface.
Branding and halfwake customization
You can upload your own text and images to customize
the appearance of the screen and user interface in both
the halfwake state and the awake state.
This feature replaces some of the functionality that was
provided by the TC Console application for TC software.
HTTP Proxy support
You can set up the video system to go through a HTTP
Proxy when registering it to Cisco’s cloud service, Cisco
Spark.
User interface features
The Settings panel is restructured.
The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch
10) can be protected by the video system’s admin
password. If the password is blank, anyone can
access the Settings and factory reset the system.
As before, Briefing Room is supported only for dual
camera systems. Also, you need a Precision 60 camera,
and a total of three screens.
•
If you select the Russian language on the user
interface, you can choose between a Russian
keyboard and a keyboard with a Latin character set.
Mute and unmute remote participants in a CMS
hosted conference (Active Control)
When a video system is enabled for Active Control in a
CMS (2.1 or later) conference you can mute and unmute
remote participants from the participant list on the user
interface (the feature must also be enabled on the CMS).
Add a background brand image to the screen and
user interface.
•
Arabic and Hebrew languages are added to the user
interface. Also localized keyboards are included.
•
Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the
screen and user interface.
•
Basic IEEE 802.1x settings are added to the Settings
panel in the user interface.
A video system that is running software version CE9.2 will
not be unmuted directly. When you try to unmute such
a video system remotely, a message will show up on its
screen requesting the user to unmute the audio locally.
In the Awake state you can:
•
Add a label or message in the bottom left corner of
the screen (not the user interface).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
The Briefing Room feature, which was introduced already
in TC software, has been reworked. The in-room control
framework is used for creating the associated user
interface elements.
•
•
Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the
screen and user interface.
Briefing Room mode
•
In the Halfwake state you can:
•
When the video system detects a person that is speaking
close to the whiteboard, the camera view will switch to
the whiteboard area. The wizard in the Settings panel
on the Touch 10 user interface helps you to set up the
feature and define where the whiteboard area is.
10
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
API commands for Custom input prompt
Intelligent Proximity changes
API commands are introduced to allow for an input prompt
in the user interface: xCommand UserInterface Message
TextInput *. When issuing the display command a
prompt with your custom text, a text input field for
the user, and a submit button, shows up on the user
interface. For example, you can prompt a user to leave
feedback after an ended call. You can specify what type
of input you want from the user: single line text, numeric,
password, or PIN code.
A Proximity indicator is displayed on the screen (middle
right) to inform that one or more clients are paired to the
system with Cisco Proximity. The old indicator (top left),
which was always shown when Proximity was enabled,
has been removed.
The prompt can only be enabled via the API, so it is
recommended to combine it with macros and either a
custom user interface panel or an auto-triggered event.
Certificate upload via API
ASCII PEM formatted certificates can be installed
directly using multiline API commands (xCommand
Security Certificates CA Add, or xCommand Security
Certificates Services Add). You can also upload
certificates to a video system from its web interface, as
before.
API commands for user management
You can create and manage user accounts directly using
API commands (xCommand UserManagement User *). As
before, you can also do this from the video system’s user
interface.
Preview mode for In-Room Controls
System settings
Appendices
You can no longer disable the Proximity services from the
user interface.
The ultrasound settings have moved from Peripherals
Pairing Ultrasound to Audio Ultrasound.
Automatic factory reset when changing the call
service (device activation)
The video system will automatically factory reset and
restart when using the user interface to change the
device activation method, for example from VCS to Cisco
UCM. This will prevent conflicting configurations when
provisioning the video system to a new service.
Changing the provisioning from the API will not
automatically factory reset the video system.
Support for separate RTP port ranges for audio
and other media
You can configure the video system so that audio uses
a different RTP port range than other media. The two
ranges cannot overlap. As default, all media use the same
RTP port range.
The In-Room Control editor has a new preview mode.
A virtual Touch 10 user interface shows how the
design looks on the user interface. The user interface
is interactive so that you can test the functionality. It
produces real events on the video system, which can
trigger any functionality you have created with a thirdparty control system or with a macro. A console in
the right pane displays both the widget values when
interacted with, and control system feedback messages.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
11
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.1
Dual Screen experience and Active Control for
CMS based meetings
Dual screen video systems can utilize both screens
for video in a CMS based meeting. The video system
receives two transcoded video streams and one content
stream from the CMS, and utilizes both screens to render
the streams.
With Active Control enabled, you get a participant list
that shows all meeting participants and their current
activity status, such as mute, sharing and active speaker
indication. You can change the layout seamlessly from the
touch interface by using the layout selection panels.
New wake-up experience
The wake-up experience has two additional standby
states: Halfwake and Standby with motion detection.
When automatic wake-up is enabled, the video system
detects presence using ultrasound (motion detection) or
when pairing to a Cisco Proximity client. The video system
wakes up with a greeting before going into the Halfwake
state, which has a simple on-screen interaction guide.
Additions for Room Analytics
Detect people presence in the room: The video system
has the capability to find whether there are people
present in the room. The feature is based on ultrasound,
and it does not keep record of who was in the room, only
whether or not the room is in use.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
12
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.0
Updated user interface
Updated In-Room Control editor
The user interfaces on the Touch 10, on screen, and on
integrated touch screens have been updated. The main
menu items on the home screen have been replaced with
more prominent activities.
The In-Room Control editor is updated with a new look,
improved logic and usability for producing a control
interface more efficiently. In addition, a new directional
pad widget and an In-Room Control simulator is added.
Some of the settings have been removed from the Touch
10 advanced settings menu to align with the on-screen
display menu.
Added language support
Wakeup on motion detection
Wakeup on motion detection senses when a person walks
into the conference room and the video system wakes up
automatically. You need to enable the following setting for
this feature to work:
xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
We have added support for Potuguese (Portugal) to the
on-screen display and Touch controller menus.
Other changes
•
Support for HTTPS client certificates has been added.
•
Unplugging the presentation cable stops the
presentation sharing instantly.
You can’t manually set the video system in standby when
this feature is enabled.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
13
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.5
New configurations
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm
Configurations that are removed
Provisioning RoomType ClassroomEnabled
Configurations that are modified
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
OLD: Default value: 70
NEW: Default value: 66
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
14
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.4
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Cameras Camera [1..2] Mirror
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Conference FarendMessage Mode
NEW: User role: ADMIN
SIP MinimumTLSVersion
Network [1] Speed
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Configurations that are removed
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed
OLD: Default value: HTTP+HTTPS
NEW: Default value: HTTPS
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
15
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.3
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed
OLD: Default value: True
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl
NEW: Default value: False
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
OLD: Value space: Manual/Off
SystemUnit CrashReporting URL
NEW: Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
UserInterface Security Mode
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100); Default value: 0
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20); Default value: 20
Security Session MaxTotalSessions
Configurations that are removed
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100); Default value: 0
Provisioning HttpMethod
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20); Default value: 20
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
16
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.2
New configurations
Configurations that are removed
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel
Replaced by Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Audio Ultrasound Mode
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Model
Replaced by Audio Ultrasound Mode
Cameras Camera[1..2] Focus Mode
Added for the integrated cameras
Macros AutoStart
Configurations that are modified
Macros Mode
Cameras Camera[n] Focus Mode
OLD: Value space: Auto/Manual
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed
NEW: Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
RTP Video Ports Range Start
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
RTP Video Ports Range Stop
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Security Audit Logging Mode
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime
OLD: Default value: Off
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
NEW: Default value: Internal
UserInterface CustomMessage
UserInterface Language
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
NEW: Arabic and Hebrew added to valuespace
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
17
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.1
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
Conference DefaultCall Rate
OLD: Default value: 3072
NEW: Default value: 6000
Configurations that are removed
Conference MultiStream Mode
OLD: Valuespace: Off; Default value: Off
None
NEW: Valuespace: Auto/Off; Default value: Auto
Network[ 1] IEEE8021X Password
OLD: Valuespace: String(0, 32)
NEW: Valuespace: String(0, 50)
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Manual/OnConnect
NEW: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
18
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.0
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Cameras Camera [n] *
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
Cameras PresenterTrack *
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Cameras SpeakerTrack *
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Configurations that are removed
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
UserInterface UserPreferences
Conference MultiStream Mode
Conference VideoBandwidth PresentationChannel Weight
OLD: Value space: Auto/Off
Standby AudioMotionDetection
NEW: Value space: Off
UserInterface Language
NEW: Portuguese added to value space
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
19
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Configurations with the new INTEGRATOR user role
Standby StandbyAction
A new user role - INTEGRATOR - is introduced in CE9.0. It has been added to the following
configurations:
Standby WakeupAction
System settings
Appendices
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
Audio DefaultVolume
SystemUnit Name
Audio Input HDMI [n] *
Time Zone
Audio Input Line [n] *
UserInterface OSD Output
Audio Input Microphone [n] *
UserInterface Wallpaper
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement *
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
Audio Output Line [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
Audio SoundsAndAlerts *
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType
CallHistory Mode
Video Input Connector [n] Name
Cameras Camera [n] *
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
Cameras PresenterTrack *
Video Input Connector [n] Quality
Cameras SpeakerTrack *
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
Video Monitors
FacilityService *
Video Output Connector [n] *
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel
Video Selfview Default *
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode
Video Selfview OnCall *
Peripherals Profile *
SerialPort BaudRate
SerialPort Mode
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
Standby BootAction
Standby Control
Standby Delay
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
20
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 1 of 6)
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800 are part of the
performance line within the Cisco portfolio of integrated
video collaboration room systems. These systems integrate
powerful functionality into an all-in-one solution for mediumto-large meeting rooms. The MX700 has two 55” LED
monitors, MX800 Single has one 70” LED monitor, and
MX800 Dual has two 70” LED monitors.
The MX700 and MX800 systems come standard with a builtin amplifier and speaker system for high fidelity sound. You
can choose from a single camera, or a dual camera speakertracking solution for MX700 and MX800 Single; MX800 Dual
comes only with the dual camera speaker-tracking solution.
Both cameras deliver the best possible video imaging with
up to 20x zoom and 1080p60 resolution. Premium resolution
and dual display are also standard features on the MX700
and MX800. The Cisco Touch 10 provides an easy-to-use
interface for both MX700 and MX800 systems.
MX700
with single camera
Industry standards compliance lets the MX700 and MX800
support calls with any third party, standards-based system,
including software-based video conferencing solutions. And,
as the industry’s first H.265-ready systems (in SIP calls), the
MX700 and MX800 lay the foundation for future bandwidth
efficiencies.
MX800 Single
with single camera
MX700
with dual camera
MX800 Single
with dual camera
MX800 Dual
Features and benefits
•
Ability to connect up to four HD input sources and
eight microphones directly to the codec.
One button to push (OBTP) to start a meeting.
•
•
Ideal for team-based collaboration, boardrooms,
meeting rooms and video centric rooms.
Full duplex audio with high-quality sound in mono, and
stereo.
•
•
Dual presentation outside of a call (e.g. use the
MX700 dual screens to compare two presentations or
documents).
Cisco TelePresence ClearPath packet loss protection
technology.
•
Built-in speaker tracking system as option.
•
Optimal definition up to 1080p60.
Native support for Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (requires Cisco Unified Communications
Manager version 8.6 or higher).
Embedded MultiSite conferencing option that
allows up to four additional participants (individual
transcoding, no external bridge).
•
H.323/SIP up to 6 Mbps point-to-point.
•
Up to 10 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth.
Powerful and feature-rich video systems with ultimate
video and audio quality.
•
Four simultaneous video inputs.
•
High performance video collaboration codec.
•
1080p60 main video and 1080p30 content.
•
High-definition pan-tilt-zoom camera.
•
•
Everything you need in one unit: screen(s), speakers,
codec, camera, microphones.
•
Three mounting options: wall mount, free standing
floor stand, floor stand secured to the wall.
•
•
•
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
21
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 2 of 6)
MX700 with a single camera
Camera
Mounting options
(20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 55” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
22
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 3 of 6)
MX700 with dual camera
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 55” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
23
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 4 of 6)
MX800 Single with single camera
Camera
Mounting options
(20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
70” monitor
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
24
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 5 of 6)
MX800 Single with dual camera
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
70” monitor
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
25
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 6 of 6)
MX800 Dual
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 70” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
26
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Power On and Off
Power On/Off with the Power switch
The power switch is behind the left side cover.
Restart and standby using the user
interface
It is located in the same place for both MX700,
MX800 Single and MX800 Dual, all mounting options.
Restart the system
1. Remove the left side cover. It snaps to magnets.
2. The power switch is next to the power connector
below the codec.
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by Restart.
3. Select Restart again to confirm your choice.
Enter/exit standby mode
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
the user interface.
2. Select Standby.
Power switch
Power Off or restart the system remotely
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Restart.
Restart the system
Click Restart device... and confirm your choice.
It takes a few minutes before the system is ready for use.
Power Off the system
Click Shutdown device... and confirm your choice.
You cannot power the system on again remotely.
For the system to power up after a remote
shutdown, turn the power switch Off and then On.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
27
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 1 of 3)
MX700
System LED /
Camera failure LED
System LED /
Camera failure LED
This LED operates as
both system LED and
camera failure LED.
Camera failure LED
Codec LEDs
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able
to see the codec
LEDs.
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
This LED operates as
both system LED and
camera failure LED for
the right camera in a
dual camera assembly.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
The side cover
is fastened with
magnets.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
28
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 2 of 3)
MX800 Single
System LED / Camera failure LED
System LED / Camera failure LED
This LED operates as both system
LED and camera failure LED.
Camera failure LED
Codec LEDs
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
This LED operates as both system
LED and camera failure LED for
the right camera in a dual camera
assembly.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
29
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 3 of 3)
MX800 Dual
System LED / Camera failure LED
Camera failure LED
This LED operates as both system LED
and camera failure LED for the right
camera in a dual camera assembly.
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
30
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 1 of 4)
In general, we recommend you to use the web interface
to administer and maintain the video system, as
described in this administrator guide.
Access method
HTTP/HTTPS
Alternatively, you can access the API of the video
system by other methods:
Notes
How to enable/disable the methods
• Used by the web interface of the video system
NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode
• Non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS)
communication
Restart the video system for changes
to take effect
•
HTTP or HTTPS (also used by the web interface)
• HTTPS: Enabled by default
•
SSH
•
Telnet
•
Serial interface (RS-232)
• HTTP: Enabled by default only for video systems
that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from
an earlier software version, provided that the
video system has not been factory reset after the
upgrade.
If you want more information about the different access
methods, and how to use the API, refer to the API guide
for the video system.
Tip
Telnet
SSH
If the configuration or status is available in the API, the
web interface setting or status translates into an API
configuration or status as follows:
Set X > Y > Z to Value (web)
is the same as
Serial interface (RS-232)
• Non-secure TCP/IP connection
NetworkServices > Telnet > Mode
• Disabled by default
You do not need to restart the video
system. It may take some time for
changes to take effect
• Secure TCP/IP connection
NetworkServices > SSH > Mode
• Enabled by default
You do not need to restart the video
system. It may take some time for
changes to take effect
• Connect to the video system with a cable. IPaddress, DNS, or a network is not required
SerialPort > Mode
xConfiguration X Y Z: Value (API)
• Enabled by default
Check X > Y > Z status (web)
is the same as
xStatus X Y Z (API)
• We recommend using the default baud rate,
because the video system may return much
feedback (SerialPort > BaudRate)
For example:
Set SystemUnit > Name to MySystem
is the same as
xConfiguration SystemUnit Name: MySystem
Restart the video system for changes
to take effect
• For security reasons, you are asked to sign in by
default (SerialPort > LoginRequired)
If all access methods are disabled (set to Off), you can no longer configure the video system. You are not able to reenable (set to On) any of the access methods, and you must factory reset the video system to recover.
Check SystemUnit > Software > Version status
is the same as
xStatus SystemUnit Software Version
More settings and statuses are available in the web
interface than in the API.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
31
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 2 of 4)
The web interface of the video system
The web interface is the administration portal for
the video system. You can connect from a computer
and administer the system remotely. It provides full
configuration access and offers tools and mechanisms
for maintenance.
Note: The web interface requires that HTTP or HTTPS
is enabled (refer to NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode
setting).
Connect to the video system
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the
video system in the address bar.
How to find the IP address
1. Select the contact information in the
upper left corner of the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by About this
device.
We recommend that you use the latest release of one
of the major web browsers.
Sign in
Enter user name and passphrase for the endpoint and
click Sign In.
The system is delivered with a default user
named admin with no passphrase. Leave the
Passphrase field blank when signing in for the
first time.
It is mandatory to set a password for the
admin user.
Sign out
Hover the mouse over
the user name and
choose Signout from
the drop-down list.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
32
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 3 of 4)
How the web interface is organized
The web interface is organized in sub-pages. All sub-pages
shown below are available if the video system is registerd to an
on-premise service (CUCM, VCS); the pages shown in grey color
are not available if the video system is registered to the Cisco
cloud service (Cisco Webex).
In both cases, a user that is signed in, sees only the pages that he
has access rights for.
Read more about user administration, user roles and access
rights in the ► User administration chapter.
Main menu
Home
Call Control
Setup
Security
Maintenance
Integration
Configuration
Users
Diagnostics
In-Room Control
Status
Service Certificates
System Logs
Macro Editor
Peripherals
CUCM Certificates
Call Logs
Startup Scripts
Personalization
Certificate Authorities
User Interface Screenshots
Developer API
Favorites
Strong Security Mode
Software Upgrade
Room Types
Sign In Banner
Option Keys
Presenter Tracking
Non-persistent Mode
Backup and Restore
System Recovery
Restart
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
33
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 4 of 4)
Settings and system information on the user interface
You have access to system information, and some basic
configurations and system tests on the video system’s user
interface.
System-critical settings and functions, such as network settings,
service activation, and factory reset, may be protected by a
passphrase, refer to the ► Restrict the access to the Settings
menu chapter.
Some of the settings and tests are also part of the Setup assistant
that is launched when the video system is powered up for the
first time. The Setup assistant is described in the Getting Started
Guide for systems running CE software.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Access Settings
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface.
2. Select Settings.
A padlock symbol
(locked down).
indicates that a setting is protected
3. Select the setting you want to change, or the test you want to
run.
If a setting is locked down, an authentication window pops up,
and you have to sign in with ADMIN credentials to proceed.
34
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 2
Configuration
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
35
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
User administration
You have to sign in to get access to the web and command line
interfaces. You can assign different roles to users, to determine
what they should have access to.
The default user account
The video system comes with a default administrator user
account with full access rights. The user name is admin and no
passphrase is initially set.
Edit an existing user account
User roles
If you make changes to a user that holds the Admin role, you must
always enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input
field for verification.
A user account may hold one or a
combination of user roles. A user account
with full access rights, like the default
admin user, should possess the ADMIN,
USER and AUDIT roles.
Change the user privileges
These are the user roles:
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Security > Users.
ADMIN: A user with this role can create
new users, change most settings, make
calls, and search the contact lists. The
user cannot upload audit certificates and
change the security audit settings.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the admin user.
Read how to set the passphrase in the ► Change the system
passphrase chapter.
Create a new user account
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
2. Click Add new user....
3. Fill in the Username, Passphrase and Repeat passphrase input
fields.
As a default, the user has to change the passphrase when he
signs in for the first time.
Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished Name) field only
if you use client certificates for authentication.
4. Check the appropriate Roles check boxes.
If you assign the ADMIN role to a user, enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.
3. Choose user roles, set the status to Acitve or
Inactive, and decide if the user has to change the
passphrase on the next sign in.
USER: A user with this role can make
calls and search the contact lists. The
user can modify a few settings, for
example adjust the ringtone volume and
set the time and date format.
Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished
Name) field only if you use certificate login on
HTTPS.
4. Click Edit User to save the changes.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
Change the passphrase
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the appropriate input fields.
4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
Delete the user account
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
6. Click Create User.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
3. Click Delete user... and confirm when prompted.
36
ROOMCONTROL: A user with this role
can create in-room controls. The user
has access to the In-room control editor
and corresponding development tools.
INTEGRATOR: A user with this role has
access to settings, commands and status
that are required to set up advanced AV
scenarios, and to integrate our video
systems with 3rd party equipment. Such a
user can also create in-room controls.
Cisco Webex registered systems
5. Set the Status to Active to activate the user.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
AUDIT: A user with this role can change
the security audit settings and upload
audit certificates.
If a video system is registered to Cisco’s
cloud service (Cisco Webex), only
local users with the INTEGRATOR and
ROOMCONTROL user roles are available.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Change the system passphrase
You need to know the system passphrase in order to:
•
Sign in to the web interface
•
Sign in and use the command line interfaces
The default user account
The video system is delivered with a default user account with
full access rights. The user name is admin, and initially, no
passphrase is set.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the default admin
user in order to restrict access to system configuration. It
is also mandatory to set a passphrase for any other user
with ADMIN rights.
A warning, saying that the system passphrase is not set, is shown
on screen until a passphrase is set for the admin user.
Other user accounts
Change your passphrase
1. Sign in to the web interface, hover the mouse over the user
name, and choose Change Passphrase in the drop down list.
2. Enter the current passphrase and new passphrase in the input
fields, and click Change passphrase.
The passphrase format is a string with 0–64 characters.
If the passphrase currently is not set, leave the Current
passphrase field blank.
Change another user’s passphrase
If you have administrator access rights, you can change the
password of any user.
You can create many user accounts for the video system.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
Read more about how to create and manage user accounts in the
► User administration chapter.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the Passphrase and Repeat
passphrase input fields.
If the user holds the Admin role, you must enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.
4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
37
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Restrict the access to the Settings menu
By default, any user has access to the Settings menu on the user
interface.
We recommend that you restrict the access to prevent
unauthorized users from changing the configuration of the video
system.
The Settings menu on the user interface
If the menu is locked down, you must sign in to access the
system-critical settings.
Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface followed by Settings, in order to open the Settings
menu.
Lock down the Settings menu
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select
Locked.
3. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Now a user has to sign in with ADMIN credentials to get
access to the system-critical settings on the user interface
(Touch controller).
Unlock the Settings menu
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select
Unlocked.
3. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Now any user has access to the complete Settings menu on
the user interface (Touch controller).
Locked down settings
Unlock settings
Locked down settings are marked with a padlock.
If you click on the padlock, you are asked
to sign in with an ADMIN user.
Once signed in, you can access all
settings until you close the Settings
menu.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
38
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
Find a system setting
Search for settings
Change a system setting
About system settings
Check the value space
All system settings can be changed from
the web interface.
A settings’s value space is specified either by text following
the input field or in a drop-down list that opens when you
click the arrow.
Each system setting is described in the
► System settings chapter.
Different settings may require different
user credentials. In order to be sure that
an administrator is able to change all
system settings, an administrator user
must possess all user roles.
Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All settings
that contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Settings
that have these letters in their value space are also shown.
You can read more about user
administration and user roles in the
► User administration chapter.
Change a value
1. Choose the preferred value from the drop-down list, or
enter new text in the input field.
2. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Use the Undo or Revert buttons if you do not want to
make any changes.
Select a category and navigate to settings
The system settings are grouped in categories. Choose a
category in the left pane to show the associated settings.
Categories with unsaved changes are marked with an edit
).
symbol (
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
39
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a sign in banner
About sign in banner
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate
to Security > Sign In Banner.
If a system administrator wants to provide
initial information to all users, he can
create a sign in banner. The message is
shown when the user signs in to the web
interface or the command line interface.
1. Enter the message that you want to
present to the user when he signs in.
2. Click Save to activate the banner.
The maximum size is: 4 kByte
Welcome banner versus sign in
banner
Sign in banner:
•
The banner is shown before the user
signs in to the web interface or the
command line interface.
Welcome banner:
•
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
40
The banner is shown after the user
has signed in to the web interface or
the command line interface.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a welcome banner
About welcome banner
Adding a Welcome banner is only available using API commands;
we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
You can set up a welcome banner that
users see after they sign in to the video
system's web interface or command line
interface. The banner can have multiple
lines.
API commands
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
This is a multiline command. Anything you input after you issue
the command, is input to the command (including line breaks).
Finish the input with a separate line containing just a period
ending with a line break.
The banner can for example contain
information you need in order to get
started, or things you must be aware of
when setting up the system.
There are also a few more welcome banner commands, refer to
the API-guide for more details.
The maximum size is: 4 kByte
This is a sign in banner
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get
Welcome banner versus sign in
banner
Sign in banner:
Example
•
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set <enter>
This is a welcome banner. <enter>
Welcome banner:
A welcome banner may have multiple lines. <enter>
•
. <enter>
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
The banner is shown before the user
signs in to the web interface or the
command line interface.
41
The banner is shown after the user
has signed in to the web interface or
the command line interface.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the service certificates of the video system
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Service
Certificates.
You need the following files:
•
Certificate (file format: .PEM)
•
Private key, either as a separate file or included in the same
file as the certificate (file format: .PEM format)
•
Passphrase (required only if the private key is encrypted)
The certificate and the private key will be stored in the same file
on the video system.
About the service
certificates of the video
system
Certificate validation may be required
when using TLS (Transport Layer
Security).
A server or client may require that the
video system presents a valid certificate
to them before communication can be
set up.
The video system’s certificates are text
files that verify the authenticity of the
system. These certificates may be issued
by a certificate authority (CA).
Enable or disable, view or
delete a certificate
Certificates are used for the following
services: HTTPS server, SIP, IEEE 802.1X
and audit logging.
Use the On and Off buttons to
enable or disable a certificate for
the different services.
You can store many certificates on the
video system, but only one certificate can
be enabled for each service at a time.
Use the corresponding button to
view or delete a certificate.
If authentication fails, the connection will
not be established.
Add a certificate
1. Browse to find the Certificate
file and Private key file (optional)
on your computer.
2. Fill in the Passphrase if required.
3. Click Add certificate... to store
the certificate on the video
system.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
42
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate
Authorities, and open the Custom CAs tab.
You need the following file:
•
CA certificate list (file format: .PEM).
About trusted CAs
Certificate validation may be required
when using TLS (Transport Layer
Security).
The video system may be set up to
require that a server or client presents
its certificate to the video system before
communication can be set up.
The certificates are text files that verify
the authenticity of a server or client. The
certificates must be signed by a trusted
CA.
View or delete a certificate
In order to verify the signature of the
certificates, a list of trusted CAs must
reside on the video system.
Use the corresponding button to
view or delete a certificate.
The list must include all CAs needed in
order to verify certificates for both audit
logging and other connections.
Upload a list of
certificate authorities
1. Browse to find the file
containing a list of CA
certificates on your computer
(file format: .PEM).
2. Click Add certificate authority...
to store the new CA certificates
on the video system.
If authentication fails, the connection will
not be established.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
Previously stored certificates are not deleted
automatically.
The entries in a new file with CA certificates
are appended to the existing list.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
43
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up secure audit logging
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Setup > Configuration.
The certificate authority (CA) that verifies the certificate
of the audit server must be in the video system’s list of
trusted certificate authorities. Otherwise, logs will not be
sent to the external server.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list.
About secure audit logging
When audit logging is enabled, all sign in
activity and configuration changes on the
video system are recorded.
Use the Security > Audit > Logging >
Mode setting to enable audit logging.
Audit logging is disabled by default.
In ExternalSecure audit logging mode
the video system sends encrypted audit
logs to an external audit server (syslog
server), which identity must be verified by
a signed certificate.
1. Open the Security category.
2. Find the Audit > Server
settings, and enter the
Address of the audit server.
The signature of the audit server is
verified using the same CA list as other
servers/clients.
If you set PortAssignment to
Manual, you must also enter
a Port number for the audit
server.
If the audit server authentication fails, no
audit logs are sent to the external server.
3. Set Audit > Logging > Mode
to ExternalSecure.
4. Click Save for the change to
take effect.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
44
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning
About pre-installed
certificates
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate
Authorities, and open the Preinstalled CAs tab.
The pre-installed certificates in this
list are only used when the video
system is provisioned by Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM) via
Expressway (Edge).
Only Cisco Expressway infrastructure
certificates are checked against this list.
If the validation of the Cisco Expressway
infrastructure certificate fails, the video
system will not be provisioned and
registered.
Factory resetting the video system
does not delete the list of pre-installed
certificates.
View or disable certificates
Use the Details... and Disable
buttons respectively, to view or
disable certificates.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
As an alternative to using the pre-installed certificates, you
can append the certificates you need to the certificate list
manually.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list of trusted
certificates.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
45
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Delete CUCM trust lists
The information in this chapter is only relevant for video systems
that are registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(CUCM).
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security >
CUCM Certificates.
More information about trust
lists
Delete the CUCM trust lists
For more information about CUCM and
trust lists, read the Deployment guide for
TelePresence endpoints on CUCM that is
available on the Cisco web site.
Click Delete CTL/ITL to remove the trust lists.
As a general rule, you should not delete old CTL
(Certificate Trust List) and ITL (Initial Trust List) files.
In these cases, you must still delete them:
•
When you change the CUCM IP address.
•
When you move the endpoint between CUCM
clusters.
•
When you need to re-generate or change the CUCM
certificate.
Overview of trust list fingerprints and certificates
The trust lists’ fingerprints and an overview of the certificates in
the lists are displayed on the web page.
This information may be useful for troubleshooting.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
46
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Change the persistency mode
Persistency mode
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security >
Non-persistent Mode.
Check the persistency status
Change the persistency settings
The active radio buttons show the current persistency status of
the video system.
All persistency settings are set to Persistent by default. You only
have to change these settings if you want to make them Nonpersistent.
Alternatively, you can navigate to Setup > Status, and then open
the Security category to see the Persistency status.
1. Click the radio buttons to set the persistency for
configurations, call history, internal logging, local phonebook
(local directory and favorites) and IP connectivity (DHCP)
information.
2. Click Save and reboot....
The video system restarts automatically. After the restart, the
behavior changes according to the new persistency settings.
Logs, configurations, and other data that was stored
before you switched to Non-persistent mode, are NOT
cleared or deleted.
Configurations, call history, internal
logs, local phonebook (local directory
and favorites list), and IP connectivity
information are stored by default.
Because all persistency settings are set
to Persistent, a system restart does not
delete this information.
Generally, we recommend you NOT to
change the persistency settings. Only
change to Non-persistent mode if
you have to prevent users from being
able to see or traceback to any logged
information from the previous session
In Non-persistent mode, the following
information is lost or cleared each time
the system restarts:
•
System configuration changes
•
Information about placed and
reveived calls (call history)
•
Internal log files
•
Changes to the local contacts or
favorites list
•
All IP related information (DHCP) from
the last session
Information that was stored before
changing to Non-persistent mode
is not automatically cleared or
deleted. You must factory reset
the video system to delete such
information.
There is more information about
performing a factory reset in the
► Factory reset the video system
chapter.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
47
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set strong security mode
About strong security mode
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security >
Strong Security Mode.
Use strong security mode only when
compliance with DoD JITC regulations is
required.
Strong security mode sets very strict
passphrase requirements, and requires all
users to change their passphrase on the
next sign in.
Set strong security mode
Read carefully about the consequences of strong
security mode before you continue.
1. If you want to use strong security mode, click
Enable Strong Security Mode.... and confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.
2. Change the passphrase when you are
prompted. The new passphrase must meet the
strict criteria as described.
How to change the system passphrase is
described in the ► Change the system
passphrase chapter.
Return to normal mode
Click Disable Strong Security Mode... in order to
restore the video system to normal mode. Confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
48
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 1 of 5)
Cisco Proximity allows users to see, control, capture and share
content directly on their own mobile devices (smartphone, tablet,
or laptop), when the device is near a video system.
The mobile device can automatically pair with the video system
when it comes within range of ultrasound transmitted by the video
system.
Proximity services
Place calls and control the video system:
•
•
Dial, mute, adjust volume, hang up
Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
View shared content on a mobile device:
•
•
View shared content, review previous slides, save selected slides
Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
•
For DX70 and DX80, this service is available only when in a call
Wireless share from a desktop client:
•
•
Share content without connecting a presentation cable
Available on laptops (OS X and Windows)
The number of simultaneous Proximity connections depends
on the type of video system. The client warns new users if the
maximum number of connections has been reached.
Video system
Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2
30 / 7
*
Codec Plus, Codec Pro
30 / 7
*
SX80
SX10, SX20
MX700, MX800
*
Maximum number of
connections
10
Place calls and control the video system
View shared content on a mobile device
7
10
MX200 G2, MX300 G2
7
DX70, DX80
3
30 connections when the View shared content on a mobile device Proximity
service is disabled; 7 connections when this service is enabled.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Wireless share from a mobile device
49
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 2 of 5)
Install a Cisco Proximity client
Where to find the clients
You can download the Cisco Proximity clients for smartphones
and tablets (Android and iOS), and laptops (Windows and OS X)
free of charge from ► https://proximity.cisco.com
Clients for smartphones and tablets are also available directly
through Google Play (Android) and Apple App Store (iOS).
End-user license agreement
Supported operating systems
•
iOS 7 and above
•
Android 4.0 and above
•
Mac OS X 10.9 and above
•
Windows 7 and above
The tile based interface introduced with Windows 8 is not
supported.
Read the end-user license agreement carefully,
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/general/warranty/
English/EU1KEN_.html
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
50
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 3 of 5)
Ultrasound emission
Cisco video systems emit ultrasound as part of the Proximity
feature.
Use the Proximity > Mode setting to switch the Proximity feature and thereby also ultrasound emission - On and Off.
Most people are exposed to ultrasound more or less daily in many
environments, including industry, commercial applications and
home appliances.
Even if airborne ultrasound may cause subjective effects for some
individuals, it is very unlikely that any effects will occur for levels
below 75 dB.
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit, Room
Kit Plus, SX10N and MX Series:
•
The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a
distance of 50 cm or more from the loudspeaker.
DX70 and DX80:
•
The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a
distance of 20 cm or more from the loudspeaker.
Headsets
DX70, DX80, and SX10N:
You can always use a headset with these systems because:
•
DX70 and DX80 have dedicated headset outputs, on which we
never emit ultrasound.
•
SX10N plays ultrasound on the built-in loudspeakers.
Ultrasound is never emitted on the HDMI or audio outputs.
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit, Room
Kit Plus, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX10, SX20, SX80, and MX
Series:
•
These systems are not designed for headset use.
•
We strongly recommend you to switch off ultrasound emission
if you use a headset with these video systems (set Proximity >
Mode to Off). Then you cannot use the Proximity feature.
•
Since these systems don’t have dedicated headset outputs,
we are not able to control the sound pressure level from the
connected headsets.
Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX10, SX20, and SX80:
•
We cannot foresee the ultrasound sound pressure level on
these video systems, because they emit ultrasound on thirdparty loudspeakers.
The volume control on the loudspeaker itself, and the Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume setting affect the ultrasound sound
pressure level; the volume control on the remote control or
Touch controller does not have any effect.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
51
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 4 of 5)
Enable Proximity services
The Proximity indicator
About Proximity
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
You can see the Proximity indicator on the screen as long
as at least one Proximity client is paired with the system.
The Proximity feature is switched On by
default.
2. Go to Proximity > Mode. Check that Proximity is On (default),
so that the video system sends ultrasound pairing messages.
The indicator doesn't disappear immediately when the last
client unpairs. It may take a few minutes.
When Proximity is switched On, the
video system transmits ultrasound pairing
messages.
Enable the services you want to allow. Only Wireless share
from a desktop client is enabled by default.
The ultrasound pairing messages are
received by nearby devices with Proximity
clients, and triggers the authentication
and authorization of the device.
In order to fully utilise the Proximity functionality, we
recommend that you enable all services.
Place calls and control the video system:
•
Go to Proximity > Services > CallControl and choose
Enabled.
Cisco recommends - for the best user
experience - that Proximity always is
switched On*.
View shared content on a mobile device:
•
Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > ToClients
and choose Enabled.
In order to get full access to Proximity,
the Proximity services (Proximity >
Services > ...) must be Enabled as well.
Wireless share from a desktop client:
•
Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > FromClients
and choose Enabled.
*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
52
We recommend not to use a headset, if you have
switched on Proximity (ultrasound).
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 5 of 5)
Room considerations
Basic troubleshooting
Additional resources
Room acoustics
Cannot detect devices with Proximity clients
Cisco Intelligent Proximity site:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/proximity
•
Rooms with hard surfaces may cause challenges due to
severe audio reflections. Acoustical treatment of meeting
rooms is always highly recommended for the best meeting
experience as well as Intelligent Proximity performance.
•
Cisco recommends only one video system with Intelligent
Proximity enabled in a room. Otherwise, interference is likely
to occur, which may lead to problems with device discovery
and session maintenance.
•
Some Windows laptops are not able to record sound in the
ultrasound frequency range (20 kHz-22 kHz). This can be due
to frequency limitations with the sound card, sound driver or
the internal microphone of the particular device. Refer to the
Support forum for more information.
•
Check Settings > Issues and diagnostics on the user interface,
or Maintenance > Diagnostics on the web interface of the
video system. If there are no ultrasound related Issues listed
("Unable to verify the ultrasound signal"), ultrasound pairing
messages are emitted by the video system as they should.
Refer to the Proximity Support forum for further assistance
with the client detection issues.
About privacy
In the Cisco Privacy statement and the Cisco Proximity
Supplement you find information about data collection in the
clients and privacy concerns that needs to be considered
when deploying this feature in the organization. Refer to:
► https://www.cisco.com/web/siteassets/legal/privacy.html
Support forum:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/proximitysupport
Audio artifacts
•
If you can hear audio artifacts, like humming or clipping
noise, decrease the maximum ultrasound volume (Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume).
Cannot share content from a laptop
•
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
For content sharing to work, the video system and the laptop
must be on the same network. For this reason Proximity
sharing might fail if your video system is connected to
your company network via Expressway, and your laptop is
connected via VPN (VPN client dependent).
53
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio
Video input quality settings
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off
between high resolution (sharpness) and high frame rate (motion).
1. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > Quality and set the video
quality parameter to Motion.
The Video Input Connector n Quality setting must be set to
Motion for the optimal definition settings to take any effect. With
the video input quality set to Sharpness, the endpoint will transmit
the highest resolution possible, regardless of frame rate.
2. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Profile and choose the preferred optimal definition profile.
3. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Threshold60fps to set the threshold below which the
maximum transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps.
Optimal definition profile
The optimal definition profile should reflect the lighting conditions
in the video conferencing room and the quality of the camera
(video input source). The better the lighting conditions and the
better the quality of the camera, the higher the profile should be
used.
Generally, the Medium profile is recommended. However, if the
lighting conditions are very good, we recommend that you test
the endpoint on the various Optimal Definition Profile settings
before deciding on a profile. The High profile may be set in order
to increase the resolution for a given call rate.
Some typical resolutions used for different optimal definition
profiles, call rates and transmit frame rates are shown in the
tables on the next page. The resolution and frame rate must be
supported by both the calling and called systems.
Threshold for sending video at 60 fps
Use the Video Input Connector n OptimalDefinition
Threshold60fps setting to decide when to allow sending video at
60 fps.
For all resolutions lower than this threshold, the maximum
transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps; for higher resolutions, 60 fps
is possible if the available bandwidth is adequate.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
54
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Introduction
Peripherals
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates
Call rate
[kbps]
128
H.264, maximum 30 fps
Normal
Medium
H.264, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
High
320×180@30
512×288@20
512×288@30
256
512×288@30
640×360@30
384
640×360@30
768×448@30
Normal
Medium
High
320×180@30
512×288@20
512×288@30
768×448@30
512×288@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
768×448@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
640×360@60
576
768×448@30
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
512×288@60
768×448@60
768×448@60
768
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
640×360@60
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1152
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1472
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1024×576@60
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1536
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
2176
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
3232
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
4736
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
6000
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates
Call rate
[kbps]
H.265, maximum 30 fps
Normal
128
512×288@30
Medium
512×288@30
H.265, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
High
640×360@30
Normal
512×288@30
Medium
High
512×288@30
512×288@60
640×360@60
256
640×360@30
768×448@30
768×448@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
384
768×448@30
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
640×360@60
768×448@60
768×448@60
576
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
768×448@60
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
768
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1152
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1472
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1536
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
2176
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
3072
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1920x1080@60**
*
The maximum bit rate for H.265 is 3 Mbps. If the bit rate is set higher the
codec uses H.264. In general, H.265 gives similar quality to H.264 at half the
bandwidth (call rate).
**
H.264
4736*
6000*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
55
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Configuration
Configuration
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface
Branding in the awake state
We recommend that you use this feature
rather than our legacy Custom wallpaper
feature, which prevents the use of
functionality such as One Button to Push.
In the awake state you can:
Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen and Touch 10)
Add a short message (text only) in the bottom left corner (only
on screen, not on Touch 10)
(page 1 of 2)
The Branding feature, as describe in
this chapter, allows you to customize
the screen and Touch user interface
appearence without compromising the
overall Cisco user experience.
From this page you can add your own branding elements
(background brand image, logo, custom message) to the video
system.
•
Appendices
About Branding
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Branding tab.
•
System settings
You cannot use the Branding feature
and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with a
Custom wallpaper, you must click Disable
the custom wallpaper before adding
branding elements.
Custom text
Logo
We recommend:
•
A black logo (the video system will add a white overlay with 40% opacity
so that the logo and the other user interface elements go well together)
•
PNG-format with transparent background
•
Minimum 272×272 pixels (it will be scaled automatically)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
56
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Branding in the halfwake state
In halfwake state you can:
•
Add a background brand image (screen and
Touch 10)
•
Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen
and Touch 10)
•
Customize or remove the message at the center
of the screen (only on screen, not on Touch 10).
This is the message that informs the user how to
start using the video system
Background brand image
In general, we recommend that you keep the
standard message. Change the message only if
you have to adapt it to a different scenario, for
example if you have a third party user interface.
•
When the video system wakes up, the
image is shown in full color; after a few
seconds the image is automatically dimmed
(transparent black overlay)
•
Image format: PNG or JPEG
•
Recommended size: 1920 × 1080 pixels
Logo
We recommend:
•
A white logo (so that it goes well with the dark
background brand image)
•
PNG-format with transparent background
•
Minimum 272×272 pixels
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
57
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a custom wallpaper
About a custom wallpaper
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Custom wallpaper tab.
If you want a custom picture as
background on your screen, you may
upload and use a custom wallpaper. A
custom wallpaper will not appear on the
Touch controller.
You can only store one custom wallpaper
on the video system at a time; a new
custom wallpaper overwrites the old one.
We recommend that you use our new
Branding feature rather than this legacy
Custom wallpaper feature. You will get a
better overall Cisco user experience, and
avoid loosing functionality such as One
Button To Push and meeting information.
See the ► Add corporate branding to
the screen and Touch 10 user interface
chapter.
You cannot use the Branding feature
and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with
branding elements you must click
Continue without branding before adding
a custom wallpaper.
Upload a custom wallpaper
Overwrites any old custom wallpaper.
1. Browse to find the custom wallpaper
image file.
2. Click Upload to save the file on the
video system.
Supported file formats: BMP, GIF,
JPEG, PNG
Maximum file size: 16 megapixels
Delete the custom wallpaper
Delete fully removes the custom
wallpaper from the video system.
You have to upload it anew if you
want use it again.
The custom wallpaper is automatically
activated once uploaded.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
58
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume
About ringtones
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Ringtones tab.
A set of ringtones are installed on the
video system. Use the web interface to
choose a ringtone, and set the ringtone
volume.
You can play back the choosen ringtone
from the web interface. Note that the
ringtone will be played back on the video
system itself, and not on the computer
running the web interface.
Change the ringtone
1. Choose a ringtone from the
drop-down list.
2. Click Save to make it the
active ringtone.
Play back the ringtone
Set the ringtone volume
Click the play button ( ► ) to
play back the ringtone.
Use the slide bar to adjust the
ringtone volume.
Use the stop button (  ) to
end the playback.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
59
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the Favorites list
Manage Favorites using
the video system’s user
interface
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to
Setup > Favorites.
Import/Export contacts from file
Click Export to save the local contacts
in a file; and click Import to bring in
contacts from a file.
Add a contact in the Favorites list
1. Select Call on the home screen.
The current local contacts are
discarded when you import new
contacts from a file.
2. Select the contact you want to add.
3. Select Add to favorites.
The contact you add will be placed in the
top folder. You cannot select or create a
sub-folder.
Add or edit a contact
1. Click Add contact to make a new
local contact, or click a contact’s
name followed by Edit contact.
Remove a contact from the
Favorites list
2. Fill in or update the form that pops
up.
Choose a folder in the folder drop
down list in order to store the
contact in a sub-folder.
Click Add contact method and fill in
the new input fields if you want to
store more than one contact method
for the contact (for example video
address, telephone and mobile
number).
3. Click Save to store the local contact.
Delete a contact
1. Click a contacts name followed by
Edit contact.
1. Select Call on the home screen.
2. Select the Favorites tab.
Add or edit a sub-folder
1. Click Add folder to make a new sub-folder, or
click one of the listed sub-folders followed by
Edit folder to change an existing sub-folder.
3. Select the contact you want to
remove.
4. Select Remove favorite.
2. Fill in or update the form that pops up.
3. Click Save to create or update the folder.
Delete a sub-folder
1. Click a folder’s name followed by Edit folder.
2. Click Delete to remove the folder and all its
contacts and sub-folders. Confirm your choice
in the dialog that pops up.
2. Click Delete to remove the local
contact.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
60
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up accessibility features
Flashing screen for incoming calls
To make it easier for the hearing impaired users to notice when
someone is calling, the screen can be setup to flash red and gray
on incoming calls.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > Accessibility > IncomingCallNotification
and select AmplifiedVisuals.
3. Click Save.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
61
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 3
Peripherals
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
62
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 1 of 3)
MX700 and MX800 Dual support one external monitor, and
MX800 Single supports two external monitors, in addition to the
video systems’ integrated monitor(s).
MX700 and MX800 Dual
The video system distributes the layout on all available monitors.
External monitor
Always switch off power when you connect and
disconnect monitors and other peripherals.
Remove the video system’s left side cover to get access to the
codec connector panel and power switch. The cover is fastened
with magnets.
Connector 3 (DVI-I)
Audio Line outputs
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
Do not disconnect the integrated monitors from the
codec, and do not use those connectors for anything else.
The reason for this is that the integrated monitor
connections make use of multichannel audio, which
drives the included speaker systems. Inserting third party
equipment is likely to break the audio chain, causing the
video system to fail from an audio perspective.
Codec connector panel
These connectors are used
for the integrated monitors.
Do not disconnect!
MX800 Single
External monitor
Connector 3 (DVI-I)
Audio Line outputs
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
Connector 2 (HDMI)
External monitor
Codec connector panel
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
63
This connector is used for
the integrated monitor.
Do not disconnect!
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 2 of 3)
Automatic setup
There is no special configuration needed on the video system in
order to support dual monitors or triple monitors scenarios. By
default the number of monitors are auto-detected, and the role
of each monitor - whether it is intended to be the first, second,
or third monitor - is automatically set according to the physical
connections.
For example, if the total number of monitors are three, the following
settings will be assumed when set to Auto:
• Video > Monitors: Triple
• Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: First
• Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Second
When do you need manual setup
You can override the default behavior by setting one or more
settings manually. You need manual setup when you want to:
•
Dedicate a monitor to only show presentations
•
Use one of the outputs for a recorder
•
Replicate the same layout on more than one monitor
•
Show the on-screen messages and indicators (OSD) on
another monitor than the video output with the lowest number
•
Set the resolution manually, e.g. if the video system fails to
detect the native resolution and refresh rate of a monitor
• Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Third
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
64
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 3 of 3)
Manual setup
About the number of
monitors and the role of
each monitor
The automatic setup works well for common single monitor,
dual monitors, and triple monitors scenarios. For more complex
scenarios, you may need manual configuration.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration,
to find the settings referred below.
Set a role for each
monitor
Set the number of
monitors
Define a role for each monitor
with the Video > Output >
Connector n > MonitorRole
setting.
Set the number of monitors
with different layouts in
your setup with the Video >
Monitors setting.
Choose monitor roles that
match your monitor setup.
When set to Auto, the video
system automatically detects
if a monitor is connected to a
connector, and thereby also
determines the number of
monitors in the setup.
Choose on which
monitor to display
messages and indicators
Set the monitor
resolution and refresh
rate
Define on which monitor to
display the messages and
indicators on-screen with the
UserInterface > OSD > Output
setting.
The video system reads the
native resolution of a monitor
and outputs this if possible.
Typically, this gives the best
possible picture for the
monitor.
When set to Auto, the video
system determines which
monitor to use based on the
number of the connector.
The other options allow you
to fix a single, dual, or triple
monitor setup; and to dedicate
one monitor for presentations.
Example 1:
Three monitors in total, and the third monitor is dedicated to only
show presentations:
If auto-detection of resolution
and refresh rate fails, you must
set the resolution manually
with the Video > Output >
Connector n > Resolution
setting.
Monitors with the same monitor role get
the same layout; monitors with different
monitor roles get different layouts.
The Video > Monitors setting must reflect
the number of different layouts in your
room setup.
Most often the number of different
layouts are the same as the number
of physical monitors, but not always. If
exactly the same layout shall be repeated
on two or more monitors, the number of
different layouts is less.
Note that a monitor can be reserved for
presentations.
Example 2:
Two monitors in total, and a recording device is attached to
Connector 3 (DVI). OSD is on the monitor on Connector 2:
•
Video > Monitors: TriplePresentationOnly
•
Video > Monitors: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Recorder
•
UserInterface > OSD > Output: 1
•
UserInterface > OSD > Output: 2
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
The Video > Output > Connector n >
MonitorRole setting assigns a role to the
monitor that is connected to the output.
The monitor role decide which layout (call
participants and presentation) will appear
on the monitor.
65
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
•
Three for single
camera systems
•
Two for dual camera
systems
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect input sources
You can connect several
external input sources
to the video system
simultaneously:
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
About the video inputs
Audio Line input
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
C
Connector 5
(S-Video/Composite)
Y
Connector 3 (HDMI)
Connector 2 (HDMI)
Connector 1 (HDMI)
Do not disconnect!
Used for the integrated
cameras in a dual
camera system.
Do not disconnect!
Used for the integrated
camera in a single
camera system.
Connect a computer
Typically, an external camera is connected to an HDMI input.
Connect a computer to a video input in order to share content
locally or with conference participants. The codec supports two
computers simultaneously.
Note about the DVI-I port and camera control
Two HDMI inputs (video systems with
a single camera) / One HDMI input
(video systems with a dual camera)
•
One DVI-I input
•
One combined S-video/Composite
video input
Typically, the inputs are used for
computers, but you can also connect
cameras or other types of video and
content sources.
Analog video input
Connector 5 comprises two BNC
sockets, and is used for S-Video or
Composite video signals.
S-Video: Connect to both the Y and C
connectors.
Connect a camera
In addition, you must connect the camera via an Ethernet switch
to the video system’s Ethernet 2 or Ethernet 3 port; or to the
camera control DSUB-9 port. The type of camera determines
whether to use Ethernet or DSUB-9.
•
Connector 4 (DVI-I)
Sign in to the web
interface and navigate to
Setup > Configuration, to
find the settings referred
in this section.
Remove the video
system’s left side cover
to get access to the
connectors. The cover is
fastened with magnets.
MX700 and MX800 has several input
connectors. The following inputs are
available for additional content sources:
Typically, computers are connected to Connector 3 (HDMI) or
Connector 4 (DVI-I).
To get audio when using DVI-I, you must also connect the
computer to one of the codec’s Audio Line inputs (Euroblock).
Composite: Connect to the Y connector.
DVI-I and Analog video input
The DVI-I and combined S-Video/
Composite video inputs cannot be used
simultaneously.
If you connect a camera to the DVI-I input, the video system
need to know the camera's serial number to be able to control it
(because EDID information is not passed on from the camera to
the video system). Use the following setting:
Cameras > Camera n > AssignedSerialNumber
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
66
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Connect input sources
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Set type and name for an input source
We recommend that you set type and name for an input source:
•
Video > Input > Connector n > InputSourceType
•
Video > Input > Connector n > Name
These settings determine the names and icons that are shown
on the user interfaces. Intuitive names and icons make source
selection easier.
About video and content quality
Use the Video > Input > Connector n > Quality setting to optimize
quality with respect to motion or sharpness.
Typically, you should choose Motion when a large number of
participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the
picture. Choose Sharpness when you want the highest quality of
detailed images and graphics.
The default value is Motion for Connector
The default value is Motion for Connector 1, 2 and 5; and
Sharpness for Connector 3 and 4.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
67
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Extend the number of input sources
You can customize our touch user interfaces to include input
sources that are connected to a third-party external video switch.
The sources will appear and behave as any other video source
that is connected directly to the video system.
Architecture
You need a Cisco video system with a touch interface, a thirdparty control system, for example Crestron or AMX, and a thirdparty video switch. It is the control system, not the video system,
that controls the video switch.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands)* in order to connect with the
video switch and the controls on the touch interface. This way you
can synchronize what is shown and done on the user interface
with the actual state of the input sources.
Touch
interface
PC
Video system
Apple TV
Third-party
video switch
API
Control
system
Chromecast
Other...
User interface with multiple external input sources (example)
Consult the CE Customization guide for full details about how to
extend the user interface, and how to use the video system’s API
to set it up. Go to:
*
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
68
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL,
INTEGRATOR, or ADMIN user roles in order to
access the API commands that you need when
programming the control system.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration,
to find the settings referred.
Configure speaker tracking
The speaker track feature uses automatic camera framing to
select the best view based on how many people are in the room.
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode
When closeup is enabled and a person in the room speaks, the
system will find the person and select the best camera framing.
The closeup may not include all the persons in the room. If you
want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times
you can turn off the closeup functionality.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack settings to configure speaker
tracking.
Products that support
speaker tracking
The following Cisco products support
speaker tracking:
Auto: Speaker tracking is enabled in general. The system will
detect people in the room and automatically select the best
camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off
instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller.
•
MX700 and MX800 with dual camera
•
SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera
or Quad camera
•
Room Kit
Off: Speaker tracking is switched off. The speaker track on/off
button will disappear from the Touch controller. The closeup
function and the tracking mode will be disabled.
•
Room Kit Plus (Codec Plus and Quad
Camera)
•
Room Kit Pro (Codec Pro and Quad
Camera)
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Closeup
•
Room 55
This setting only applies when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
is set to Auto
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70
•
Room 70 G2
Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the
camera framing at all times.
Tracking mode
The tracking mode defines how fast the camera view switch to a
new speaker when the tracking algorithm detects a change.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > TrackingMode setting to
select between the two modes.
Auto: This is the default setting.
Conservative: The system reacts slower to detected changes,
and the camera view will switch to a new speaker later.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
69
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Settings that are overidden by the speaker
track functionality
Applies only to video systems with a dual camera.
These settings are changed automatically when speaker tracking
is on:
•
Video > Input > Connector n > Quality
These settings are always forced to Motion for the connectors
where the dual cameras are connected. If both settings are
already set to Motion, there is no change.
•
Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Threshold60fps
These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal
for the connectors where the dual cameras are connected.
If they are not equal the lowest threshold among the two is
preferred.
•
Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition > Profile
These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal for
the connectors where the dual cameras are connected. If they
are not equal the preferred setting is the first value in the list,
(Normal, Medium, High) that one of the two settings has.
The settings above are reset to the value they used to have,
as soon as you turn off speaker tracking. This is regardless of
whether you have used the user interface or the Cameras >
SpeakerTrack > Mode setting to turn off speaker tracking.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
70
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 1 of 3)
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker
tracking functionality, thus you need a camera that
supports SpeakerTrack:
•
MX700 and MX800 with dual camera
•
SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera or Quad camera
•
Room Kit
•
Room Kit Plus (Codec Plus and Quad Camera)
•
Room Kit Pro (Codec Pro and Quad Camera)
•
Room 55
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70
•
Room 70 G2
Preparations
Whiteboard position
Speaker track camera
Accurate distance (d)
between camera
and whiteboard
d
With the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera
captures both the person and the whiteboard when a
person next to the whiteboard is speaking.
W
Speaker position
W
Sound
tracking
area
Whiteboard
The whiteboard must be placed across the room from
the camera, as shown in the illustration.
The Sound tracking area is from half the whiteboard
and up.
When configuring the feature, you need to know
the accurate distance between the camera and the
whiteboard.
Thus, the person presenting on the whiteboard must
stand upright next to the whiteboard. He or she
cannot move about in the room.
Without the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera
captures only the person.
W
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
71
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 2 of 3)
Troubleshooting
The Snap to Whiteboard wizard is only available when:
•
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode is Auto.
Define the whiteboard area
Use the wizard on the Touch controller to define the whiteboard
area.
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the
Touch controller and open the Settings menu.
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard - use the back button
to move to
if you want to redo a step, and the next button
the next step:
•
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard.
Move the slider to set the distance between the camera
and the whiteboard. It is important that the distance is
measured accurately.
Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is
passphrase protected on your video system.
3. Tap Configure or Reconfigure to start the wizard (depends
whether you configure the feature for the first time or not).
•
If the camera does not move to the
whiteboard position when the person
who is speaking stands next to the
whiteboard, check the following and redo
the required steps in the wizard:
•
Check that the whiteboard is placed
across the room from the camera.
•
Check that the distance between the
camera and whiteboard is measured
accurately.
•
The person who is speaking must be
close to the whiteboard. Furthermore,
the person must stand upright so that
the sound comes from the upper half
of the whiteboard area.
Adjust the camera view (pan, tilt, zoom) to frame the
whiteboard. Leave some space on both sides for the
person that will be speaking.
W
•
Fine tune both cameras (pan, tilt, zoom) to show the same
view.
•
Stand next to the whiteboard and start speaking.
If the camera zooms to the view that you have chosen for
the whiteboard, the feature is correctly set up, and ready
to use. If not, see the troubleshooting notes to the right.
•
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Tap
to close the wizard, and
panel.
72
to close the Settings
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 3 of 3)
Enable and disable Snap to Whiteboard
You can enable or disable the Snap to Whiteboard feature from
the Settings menu on the Touch controller or from the web
interface.
If the Settings menu on the Touch controller is open (not
protected by the ADMIN passphrase), any user can switch
the feature On and Off during a meeting or between
meetings. Moreover, any user can reconfigure the feature.
How to switch on speaker
tracking
From the Touch controller
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the
Touch controller and open the Settings menu.
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard.
Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is
protected by a passphrase on your video system.
3. Set the toggle switch to:
Speaker tracking, which can be switched
on and off by the user at any time,
must be switched on for the Snap to
Whiteboard extension to work.
Tap the camera icon in the status bar of
the Touch controller, and use the toggle
button to switch speaker tracking on and
off.
Enabled: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the
camera will capture both the person that speaks and the
whiteboard he or she is standing next to.
W
W
Disabled: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera
will capture only the person that speaks.
From the web interface
1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
Camera view when Snap to
Whiteboard is enabled
Camera view when Snap to
Whiteboard is disabled
2. Find the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Whiteboard > Mode
setting.
On: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the camera will
capture both the person that speaks and the whiteboard
he or she is standing next to.
Off: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera will
capture only the person that speaks.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
73
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
The PresenterTrack feature enables the camera to follow
the presenter, while the presenter moves about on stage.
When the presenter leaves the stage the tracking stops.
A system administrator must define the stage area and
the trigger zone. We recommend you to be in the room
while setting up PresenterTrack.
Prerequisites
Maintenance
Codec Plus with Precision 60 camera
•
Room 70 with Precision 60 as external camera
•
Codec Pro with Precision 60 camera or SpeakerTrack
60 camera
•
Room 70 G2 with Precision 60 as external camera
•
MX700 or MX800 with single or dual camera
•
SX80 with Precision 60 camera or SpeakerTrack 60
camera
Appendices
(page 1 of 5)
Plan the room and the stage area
Plan the trigger zone
Consider where to place the camera, that is used for
presenter tracking, to obtain an optimal user experience.
The trigger zone is the area where presenter tracking
is triggered. The trigger zone must cover an area that
enables the detection of a presenter's face.
Allow the audience or meeting participants to move
naturally in the room, without being tracked unintended.
The stage area is the zoomed-out overview image. Make
it large enough so the presenter can move about on stage.
When the presenter leaves the stage area the tracking stops.
The PresenterTrack is supported with:
•
System settings
Choose a location where the presenter(s) naturally will
enter the stage, for example by the speakers podium
or presenters desk. The trigger zone is not visible for
person(s) coming up on stage, so make it easy for the
person to be detected.
To avoid false face detection, make sure the background
of the trigger zone is neutral. Avoid having the trigger zone
in front of a monitor.
Stage area
Trigger zone
PresenterTrack feature
•
Supports two persons in the cropped image.
•
Can be used in combination with Briefing Room
mode.
•
You can use one of the SpeakerTrack 60 cameras for
PresenterTrack.
•
The camera uses digital pan, tilt and zoom, so it will
not move physically.
•
PresenterTrack and SpeakerTrack cannot be used
simultaneously. When you activate PresenterTrack,
SpeakerTrack is disabled, and vice versa.
The exception is when using the Briefing Room setup – both are active simultaneously in Q&A mode
(when someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
74
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
(page 2 of 5)
Step 1: Position the cameraSign in to the web
Tip
interface:
•
We recommend that you are in
the room when you configure the
PresenterTrack feature.
•
Use the Touch controller to adjust the
camera (zoom, pan, tilt) to define the
stage area.
•
Use the video system's web interface
to define the trigger zone. At the
same time, watch the screen of the
video system to see the result.
•
Activate the PresenterTrack feature
from the camera panel on the Touch
controller.
1. Navigate to Setup > Presenter Tracking.
2. Check the Enable PresenterTrack check box.
3. Click Configure... to open the configuration page.
When you click the Configure... button on the video
system's web interface, this will happen:
•
Standby is deactivated.
•
Full screen self-view is enabled.
•
The trigger zone rectangle is shown on screen.
•
If already active, the PresenterTrack feature is
deactivated.
Note that if you leave this web page at this stage,
without doing any changes, the trigger zone rectangle
is still visible on the video system's screen.
•
If you are not in the room: Click the Done button to
remove the trigger zone rectangle on the screen.
•
If you are in the room: Tap the Camera icon on the
Touch controller and choose a camera position
from the list.
Appendices
Stage area: The zoomed out overview
image. Make it large enough so that
the presenter can move around. When
the presenter leaves the stage area
the tracking stops.
4. Choose a camera from the Camera source drop down list.
A Precision 60 or SpeakerTrack 60 camera is required to
enable the PresenterTrack feature. If the camera does not
meet the requirements you will see a notification. Define
the stage area. Use the Touch controller to adjust the full
screen self-view (zoom, pan, tilt) if necessary. The camera
must cover the stage area that is used by a presenter.
When the presenter leaves the stage the camera will stop
following the presenter.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
75
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 5)
Step 2: Set the trigger zone
A polygonal trigger zone
The trigger zone defines the area where
presenter tracking is triggered.
You can set up a rectangular trigger zone
from the Presenter Tracking web page.
You cannot see the video from the room
in the web interface. An empty gray area
represents the camera view and a dashed
rectangle represents the trigger zone. Watch
the video system screen to see the video
from the room, together with the same
dashed rectangle as you see in the web
interface.
•
•
Adjust the size and location of the trigger
zone to cover a suitable area to detect
a presenter's face. The change you do
on the video system's web interface is
reflected on the video system screen.
If you want to define a polygonal trigger
zone, you must go to the Setup >
Configuration page, and find the
Cameras > PresenterTrack > TriggerZone
setting.
Trigger zone
The value of this setting is a string
composed of the coordinate pairs of the
vertices of the polygon.
Example:
Define the following trigger zone, which
has 12 vertices.
Video system screen: See the video from the room when you set the trigger zone.
The trigger zone must be large enough
to detect a presenter face. Have in mind
that people are of different heights.
0
Click Save.
0
500
1000
1500
1920
500
Stage area
The zoomed out overview image of the
room is represented by a blank box in
the video system's web interface.
1080
The coordinates of the vertices are:
Trigger zone
The dashed rectangle can be moved
around and re-sized. You can see the
same rectangle on the endpoint screen
when you define the trigger zone.
(300,100)
(1700,100)
(1700,700)
(1100,700)
(1100,600)
(1300,600)
(1300,300)
(700,300)
(700,600)
(900,600)
(900,700)
(300,700)
The corresponding setting value is:
Cameras > PresenterTrack > TriggerZone:
300,100,1700,100,1700,700,1100,700,
1100,600,1300,600,1300,300,700,300,
700,600,900,600,900,700,300,700
Web interface: Set the trigger zone.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
76
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 5)
Step 3: Test PresenterTrack in action
User scenarios
Activate PresenterTrack.
We do not support tracking of more than
one person, but sometimes more than
one person is in the cropped image.
1. Tap the Camera icon in the upper right corner of the Touch
controller.
2. Select Presenter from the list of camera positions to activate
presenter tracking.
3. The camera is now ready for presenter tracking, and you can
test the feature:
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone.
b. When you are detected the camera zooms in on you.
Walk back and forth on stage and check that the camera
follows you.
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone.
When multiple faces are in the cropped
image, the faces will be tracked as long
as they all move in the same direction.
If they move in different directions the
tracking stops and the image zooms out
and show the stage area. To start the
presenter tracking again, the presenter
must go to the trigger zone to be
detected.
Scenario 1: A person is interviewed by
another. They are both followed by the
camera as long as they stand still or move
in the same direction.
c. Leave the stage area to stop presenter tracking.
If necessary, go back to Step 1 or Step 2 to adjust the size of the
stage area or the trigger zone.
Scenario 2: When a presenter is replaced
by another the tracking stops. The new
presenter must move into the trigger zone
to be detected by the camera.
b. The camera zooms in on the presenter.
If you need to disable, and thereafter
enable, presenter tracking in a controlled
manner this can be done on the Touch
controller.
1. Tap the Camera icon in the status bar.
2. Deselect Presenter from the list
of camera positions to disable
PresenterTrack, and select Presenter
again to enable the feature.
c. Leave the stage to stop presenter tracking.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
77
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 5 of 5)
Diagnostics mode
In order to troubleshoot you can set the video system in
PresenterTrack diagnostics mode.
•
The green square
indicates the at face is
tracked.
Sign in to the xAPI and run the following command.
xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack Set Mode: Diagnostic
The blue square indicates
the at face is detected but
not tracked.
In diagnostics mode the video system screen shows the stage
area (the zoomed out overview image), and the indicators:
RED: The trigger zone.
The red rectangle is
the trigger zone.
YELLOW: The cropped image that shows a zoomed in view of
the presenter.
GREEN: A face is detected and it is tracked.
GREEN BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a positive face detection.
If the tracked individual does not get a valid face-read the
square will become red.
RED BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a false face detection. After
some seconds the tracking will stop.
BLUE: A face is detected but the face is not tracked.
The yellow rectangle is the cropped
image that follows the presenter. The
yellow rectangle is not visible until a
person steps into the trigger zone and is
being tracked.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
78
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Briefing room set-up (page 1 of 6)
The briefing room set-up is designed to provide easy set up,
management and use of a room for education, training or similar.
The set-up is tailored around the following room modes:
•
Local Presenter (the presenter is in the room)
•
Remote Presenter (the presenter is calling in)
•
Discussions (for discussions between different sites with a
local presenter in the room)
Audience
camera
The briefing room is available as a room type template, which
means that the required configurations are pushed automatically
to the video system when you select the template.
Presenter
camera
In order for these configurations to match the room, it is important
that the room is set up correctly, and that cameras and displays
are connected exactly as specified in this chapter.
Presentation
display
Products supporting Briefing room
Remote
audience
display
Remote
presenter
display
Codecs:
•
SX80
•
Codec Pro
Integrated video systems:
•
MX700, MX800 Single, MX800 Dual
•
Room 70 Single G2, Room 70 Dual G2
Required equipment
•
Three displays (Presentation display, Remote presenter
display, and Remote audience display)
•
Two cameras (Audience camera and Presenter camera)
•
Microphones
•
Speakers
•
Touch 10 user interface.
Briefing room set-up
*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
*
The illustration shows a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same principle applies also to
the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera combinations.
79
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Briefing room set-up
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 6)
Room modes
The set-up is tailored around the following pre-defined room modes*:
Local Presenter mode
Remote Presenter mode
Discussion mode
The presenter is in the room.
The presenter is calling in.
For discussions between different sites with a local
presenter in the room.
The local presenter mode also covers the case when
someone in the local audience asks a question (Q&A).
Local Presenter mode
Video sent to the far end
Sends video from the Presenter camera
Remote Presenter mode
Discussion mode
Sends video from the Audience camera
Sends video from the Audience camera
Q&A: Sends split-screen video from the Presenter
camera and the person asking the question
(Audience camera)
Remote presenter display
Shows the presentation
Shows the presenter that is calling in, and other
remote sites (you can decide the layout locally)
Shows the remote sites that are part of the
discussion (you can decide the layout locally)
Presentation display
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
Remote audience display
Shows the remote participants that are calling in
from different sites
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
If there is no presentation, nothing will be shown on the corresponding screens (gray).
*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
80
The illustrations show a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same principle
applies also to the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera combinations.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 6)
Room arrangement examples
Recommendation
•
•
Remote presenter display: 1st screen, placed
at front. For integrated systems, this is its (left)
screen.
Presentation display: 2nd screen, placed at front.
For integrated systems with two screens, this is
its right screen.
•
Remote audience display: 3rd screen, placed
further back.
•
Audience camera: The integrated camera for
systems that have that, or a Cisco Quad Camera
or Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera
assembly. It is also possible to use a camera
without speaker tracking capabilities.
•
Presenter camera: Cisco TelePresence Precision
60 with presenter tracking enabled.
•
Microphones: Cisco TelePresence Ceiling
Microphone for good coverage of the room. Other
microphone solutions can also be used.
•
Presentation
display
Remote
presenter
display
Remote
presenter
display
Audience camera
Presentation
display
Audience camera
(single or dual)
Remote audience display
Presenter camera
Microphones
Microphones
Presenter camera
Remote audience display
Speakers: The integrated speakers for systems
that have that, or good quality stereo speakers
placed next to the Presentation display and the
Remote presenter display.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
81
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 6)
Connect cables
It is very important to connect the
cameras and monitors to the video
system as illustrated; otherwise the
configuration that is pushed to the
video system when selecting the
Briefing room type template will not
match your actual set-up.
You only need to connect the
external monitors and cameras;
keep all the other connectors,
including the integrated cameras
and displays as first installed.
Remote Audience Display
Presentation Display
(MX700, MX800D: right integrated screen
Remote Presenter Display
(MX800: integrated display
MX700, MX800D: left integrated screen)
Computer
Presenter
Camera
Microphones,
max 8
Audience camera
(integrated camera,
single or dual)
To PoE injector
Network (LAN)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Ethernet switch
82
1
If the video system has a single camera, only camera input 1 is used.
2
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 need Ethernet connection to
the codec. We recommend that you add an Ethernet switch to
Network port 2 as illustrated. Do not connect the Ethernet switch to
Network port 1, which is reserved for the LAN connection.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
2. It is important that the Presenter camera is not being
shared. Use the Touch interface to stop sharing the
video from the Presenter camera.
3. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configurations.
4. Go to the Video > Input > Connector 3 section, and set
the following:
InputSourceType: camera
PresentationSelection: Manual
•
Quality: Motion
•
Visibility: Never
•
CameraControl Mode: On
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 5 of 6)
1. Connect cameras and screens as described on the
previous page.
•
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Configure the video system
•
Administrator Guide
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
5. Set up PresenterTrack for the Presenter camera, see
the ►Set up the PresenterTrack feature chapter.
6. Navigate to Setup > Room Types in the web interface.
7. Click the Briefing thumbnail to push the corresponding
configuration to the video system.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Change room mode while in a conference
Switching between room modes (Local Presenter, Remote Presenter, Discussions), which implies that camera input sources,
and remote and local screen layouts, are changed, can be done in two ways:
•
Automatically, based on who is speaking and whether a local presenter are present on stage.
•
Manually, using the buttons on the Touch user interface.
Choose between automatic or manual switching between room modes
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
2. Use the Cameras > PresenterTrack > PresenterDetectedStatus setting to determine whether to enable (default) or
disable automatic switching between Local Presenter and Remote Presenter modes. The room mode will not change
automatically if the current mode is Discussions.
Switch room modes automatically
Switch to another room mode manually
Only supported with Cisco TelePresence Precision 60
as Presenter camera, and the PresenterTrack feature
enabled (Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled set to True).
While in a conference, you can switch to another mode
using the Touch controller.
Automatic switching implies:
•
The system switches to Local Presenter mode when a
person is detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone.
•
The system switches to Remote Presenter mode
when the local presenter, who is tracked, leaves the
stage.
•
If someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode, the
system sends split-screen video of both the presenter
and the person asking the question. This requires
Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Webex
Quad Camera as Audience camera, and that speaker
tracking is switched on.
83
1. Tap Briefing Room on the Touch controller.
2. Tap the mode you want to change to.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 6 of 6)
Limitations
These features are not supported when using Briefing Room:
•
MultiSite (embedded multipoint switch)
•
H.265 video encoding
•
Content sharing to Proximity clients
•
Directional audio
•
Snap to Whiteboard
•
Active control (selection of layouts from CMS)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
84
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 1 of 5)
The Classroom set-up is designed to provide easy set up,
management and use of a room for education, training or similar.
The Classroom is available as a room type template, which means
that the required configurations are pushed automatically to the
video system when you select the template.
In order for these configurations to match the room, it is important
that the room is set up correctly, and that the cameras are
connected exactly as specified in this chapter.
Required equipment
•
One or more screens (configurable).
•
Two cameras (Audience camera and Presenter camera)
•
Microphones
•
Speakers
•
Touch 10 user interface.
Classroom versus Briefing Room set-up
The Classroom set-up is more flexible than the Briefing room setup, which is available for SX80, Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, and
Room 70 G2, when it comes to the number of screens and how
the layout is distributed on the screens.
Room modes
The Classroom set-up is tailored around the following pre-defined
room modes: Local Presenter, Remote Presenter, and Discussion.
•
The local presenter mode also covers the case when
someone in the local audience asks a question (Q&A).
Sends video from the Presenter camera to the far end.
•
SX80, Codec Pro, Codec Plus
Integrated video systems:
The presenter is in the room.
•
Codecs:
•
Local Presenter mode
•
Products supporting
Classroom
Q&A: Sends split-screen video from the Presenter camera
and the person asking the question (Audience camera) to
the far end.
•
MX700, MX800 Single, MX800 Dual
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70 Single, Room 70 Dual
•
Room 70 Single G2, Room 70 Dual G2
Remote Presenter mode
•
The presenter is calling in.
•
Sends video from the Audience camera to the far end
Discussion mode
•
For discussions between different sites with a local presenter
in the room.
•
Sends video from the Audience camera to the far end
In Classroom you can use any number of screens, as long as it is
supported by the video system, typically two or three. You must
use the video monitor settings to configure the distribution of
layouts on the screens, if the default behavior does not fulfil your
requirements.
In Briefing room you have to use three screens, and the layouts
on the screens are pre-configured (and fixed) to match that
particular scenario.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
85
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 2 of 5)
Room arrangement examples
Recommendation
Audience camera:
•
The integrated camera for systems that have that, or a Cisco
Quad Camera or Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60
camera assembly. In general we recommend a camera with
speaker tracking, but it is also possible to use a camera
without speaker tracking capabilities.
Main screen
Presenter camera:
•
Audience
camera
Second
screen
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 with presenter tracking
enabled.
Presenter
camera
Microphones:
•
Main screen
Audience
camera
Cisco TelePresence Ceiling Microphone for good coverage of
the room. Other microphone solutions can also be used.
Microphones
Microphones
Speakers:
•
The integrated speakers for systems that have that, or good
quality stereo speakers placed next to the main screen in the
front of the room.
Presenter
camera
Second
screen
Screens:
•
You can use one or more screens (the maximum number of
screens are determined by the video system).
•
For most set-ups, Cisco recommends that you use two
screens (or more): A main screen placed at the front of the
room, and a second screen on the side or at the back, so that
the local presenter can see the remote audience.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
86
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 3 of 5)
Connect cables
It is important to connect the cameras to the video system
as illustrated; otherwise the configuration that is pushed to
the video system when selecting the Classroom room type
template will not match your actual set-up.
You only need to connect the external screens and
cameras; keep all the other connectors, including the
integrated cameras and screens as first installed.
You can have up to 3 screens,
including the integrated screen(s)
Computer
...
Presenter
Camera 2
Audience camera
(integrated camera,
single or dual)
Microphones,
max 8
1
If the video system has a single camera, only camera input 1 is used.
2
You may connect the Presenter camera to HDMI input 2 instead of input 3, if
input 2 is available.
3
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 need Ethernet connection to the codec. We
recommend that you add an Ethernet switch to Network port 2 as illustrated.
Do not connect the Ethernet switch to Network port 1, which is reserved for
the LAN connection.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
To PoE injector
Network (LAN)
Ethernet switch
87
3
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 4 of 5)
Configure the video system
1. Connect cameras and screens as described on the
previous page.
2. It is important that the Presenter camera is not being
shared. Use the Touch interface to stop sharing the video
from the Presenter camera.
3. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configurations.
4. Go to the Video > Input > Connector 3 section, and set
the following: *
•
•
•
•
•
InputSourceType: camera
PresentationSelection: Manual
Quality: Motion
Visibility: Never
CameraControl Mode: On
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
5. Set up PresenterTrack for the Presenter camera, see the
►Set up the PresenterTrack feature chapter.
6. If the default screen and layout behavior does not suit
your set-up, you must configure the screens and layouts
using the following settings:
•
Video > Monitors: Defines the number of different
layouts in your room set-up.
•
Video > Output > Connector n > MonitorRole: Defines
which layout each screen will get. Screens with
different monitor roles get different layouts.
Refer to the chapter about connecting monitors for
details.
Change room mode while in a conference
Switching between room modes (Local Presenter, Remote Presenter, Discussions), which implies that camera input sources,
and remote and local screen layouts, are changed, can be done in two ways:
•
Automatically, based on who is speaking and whether a local presenter are present on stage.
•
Manually, using the buttons on the Touch user interface.
Choose between automatic or manual switching between room modes
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
2. Use the Cameras > PresenterTrack > PresenterDetectedStatus setting to determine whether to enable (default) or
disable automatic switching between Local Presenter and Remote Presenter modes. The room mode will not change
automatically if the current mode is Discussions.
Switch room modes automatically
Switch to another room mode manually
Only supported with Cisco TelePresence Precision 60
as Presenter camera, and the PresenterTrack feature
enabled (Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled set to True).
While in a conference, you can switch to another mode
using the Touch controller.
Automatic switching implies:
•
The system switches to Local Presenter mode when a
person is detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone.
•
The system switches to Remote Presenter mode
when the local presenter, who is tracked, leaves the
stage.
•
If someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode, the
system sends split-screen video of both the presenter
and the person asking the question. This requires
Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Webex
Quad Camera as Audience camera, and that speaker
tracking is switched on.
1. Tap Classroom on the Touch controller.
2. Tap the mode you want to change to.
7. Navigate to Setup > Room Types in the web interface.
8. Click the Classroom thumbnail to push the corresponding
configuration to the video system.
*
Assuming that the Presenter camera is connected to Connector 3. If you have connected the Presenter camera to Connector 2, go to the Video > Input > Connector 2 section instead.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
88
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 5 of 5)
Limitations
These features are not supported when using Classroom:
•
MultiSite (embedded multipoint switch)
•
H.265 video encoding
•
Content sharing to Proximity clients
•
Directional audio
•
Snap to Whiteboard
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
89
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Test the loudspeaker connections (page 1 of 2)
Loudspeakers
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
It is crucial for the conferencing
experience that the video system’s
loudspeakers are correctly connected to
the embedded codec.
We have provided a speaker check tool that you can run to
verify that the loudspeakers are correctly connected.
Correct cabling ensures that sound meant
to be coming from the right loudspeakers
actually comes from the right speakers,
and the sound meant to be coming from
the left loudspeakers actually comes from
the left speakers. If the speaker cables
are incorrectly connected this will not
take place.
You must be in the same room as the video system when
you test the loudspeaker connections.
Run the speaker check
If the speaker check reveals any issues,
you must reconnect the cables.
1. Enter the following command in the Execute API
commands and configurations text area: *
xCommand Audio SpeakerCheck
MeasurementLength: <number of seconds>
Volume: <test-signal volume>
How to reconnect cables
Check the Installation Guide for the
product for all details.
If you leave out the MeasurementLength and
Volume parameters, the test signal is emitted for
1 second from each speaker, and the volume is 1.
1. Remove the video system’s upper
textile grille. It snaps to magnets.
2. Click Execute.
2. Unscrew the screw that fastens the
loudspeaker (Torx T20). Then, release
the speaker gently from its peg.
The speaker check will now run, and a test signal
will be emitted from each speaker, in sequence
from left to right.
3. Disconnect the cable that is
connected incorrectly, and connect
the correct cable.
3. Listen for the test signals.
If one or more speakers do not make a sound, or
the sequence is not strictly from left to right, you
have to reconnect the loudspeaker cables and run
the speaker check again.
*
The cables are marked with a
number. Check the next page to see
which cable should be connected to
which loudspeaker.
Syntax and semantics are explained in the API guide for the video system.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
90
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Test the loudspeaker connections (page 2 of 2)
Find the correct cable for each loudspeaker
The numbers that are shown in the illustrations
are printed on the loudspeaker cables.
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
5
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
5
4
Not
used
MX700
with dual camera
MX700
with single camera
1
1
2
1
3
2
3
4
5
4
6
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
3
4
5
6
5
1
6
Not
used
MX800 Single
with single camera
2
Not
used
MX800 Single
with dual camera
2
3
4
5
6
MX800 Dual
91
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Using extra loudspeakers and local reinforcement
Configuration example
With MX700, MX800 Single and MX800 Dual extra loudspeakers
are required to enable local reinforcement functionality.
MX700/800
The configuration example describes a setup with the integrated loudspeakers
(HDMI) as main loudspeakers, the extra loudspeakers on Line Output 1 and 2,
and local presenters’ microphones on Microphone Input 1 and 2.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration, to find the
settings referred below.
PC-input audio
1. Set the delay (ms) for the extra loudspeakers:
Audio > Output > Line 1 > Delay > DelayMs : <0..290>
Audio > Output > Line 2 > Delay > DelayMs : <0..290>
and
Local presenter, PC-input audio
eakers
Far End audio sent to extra loudsp
Master
Volume
Delay
Gain
PC-input audio and
Far End audio sent to
built-in loudspeakers
Gain
The delay can vary based on where in the room the loudspeakers are
placed. To calculate the delay, see the Using Extra Loudspeakers and Local
Reinforcement guide.
Gain
2. Switch on reinforcement for the microphones that the local presenters will
use:
Microphone
reinforcement
gain
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Input > Microphone 1 Mode : On
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Input > Microphone 2 Mode : On
Microphones
for local presenter
3. Switch on reinforcement for the extra loudspeakers:
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Output > Line 1 > Mode : On
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Output > Line 2 > Mode : On
4. Set the amplification of the microphone signal from the local presenters to
the extra loudspeakers:
Audio > MicrophoneReinforcement > Gain : <-54..15>
Adjust the gain in small steps and make sure that the final setting is well
below the feeding level.
Adaptive echo
cancelers
PC-input audio
Additional resources
Audio to Far End
Audio from Far End (incl
uding any Far End PC-
input audio)
We recommend reading the Using Extra Loudspeakers and Local
Reinforcement guide for a comprehensive description and best practices for
the solution.
►https://www.cisco.com/c/dam/en/us/td/docs/telepresence/endpoint/misc/
audio/extra-loudspeakers-local-reinforcement-guide-mx700-mx800-sx80.pdf
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
92
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 4)
Touch 10 must either be directly connected to the video
system as described on this page, or paired to the video
system via the network (LAN) as described on the next
page. The latter is referred to as remote pairing.
Connect Touch 10 directly to the video
system
Connect Touch 10 to the video system’s PoE injector as
illustrated.
Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up
procedure begins. Follow the instructions on screen.
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be
downloaded from the video system and installed on the
unit automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch
10 restarts after the upgrade.
PoE rated Ethernet cable
Contact information
The video system’s name or
address is displayed in the status
bar when Touch 10 is successfully
connected to the video system.
The Ethernet connector
is at the rear of Touch 10.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
93
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 4)
Connect Touch 10 to the video system via the
network (LAN)
Connect Touch 10 and the video system to network wall sockets or
to a network switch as illustrated.
Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up procedure begins.
Follow the instructions on screen.
Standard Ethernet cable
When the Select a room system screen appears, note the following:
•
A list of video systems signalling that they are available for paring
will show up on the screen. Tap the name of the video system
you want to pair with.
Network
(LAN)
Note that the following must be fulfilled for a video system to
show up in the list:
•
•
•
The video system and Touch 10 must be on the same subnet.
•
The video system must have been restarted within the last 10
minutes. If the video system does not appear in the list, try
restarting it.
If the video system does not appear in the list of available
systems, enter its IP address or hostname in the input field. Tap
Connect.
You have to log in with username and passphrase for the paring
process to commence. Tap Login.
A user with the USER role is sufficient; you do not need the
ADMIN role to perform this task.
Read more about how to create a user account and assign a role
to it in the ► User administration chapter.
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be
downloaded from the video system and installed on the unit
automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch 10 restarts after
the upgrade.
Standard Ethernet cable
PoE
injector
Network
(LAN)1
SWITCH
Power
AP
PoE rated Ethernet cable
• 100-240 VAC
• 50/60 Hz
Contact information
The video system’s name or
address is displayed in the
status bar when Touch 10
is successfully paired to the
video system.
1
The Ethernet connector
is at the rear of Touch 10.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
94
If the network infrastructure provides
Power over Ethernet (PoE), you do not
need a PoE injector; Touch 10 should
be connected directly to the wall socket
(Ethernet switch) with a PoE rated
Ethernet cable.
For safety, the PoE source must be in
the same building as Touch 10. The PoE
rated Ethernet cable can be up to 100 m
(330 ft).
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 4)
Cisco Touch 10 physical interface
This is the new version of the Touch 10 controller launched late 2017. It has the same functionality
as the previous version, but has a slightly different physical interface. The new device is identified
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.
Touch screen
Factory reset
(behind cover)
Adjustable support
to accommodate
individual ergonomic
needs
Micro-USB:
for maintenance only
(behind cover)
Ethernet with PoE:
for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment
Audio mute
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
95
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 4)
Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 physical interface
See next page for a newer version of the Touch 10 controller.
Touch screen
Adjustable support
to accommodate
individual ergonomic
needs
Micro-USB:
for maintenance only
Two USB connectors
(not in use)
Ethernet with PoE:
for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment
Audio mute
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Mini-jack, 3.5 mm
(not in use)
96
Not in use
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect the ISDN Link
The ISDN Link enables a video system to use ISDN lines for
connectivity, and enables both video calls and telephone calls
over the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).
ISDN Link support ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI and V.35. ISDN can be
used in addition to regular IP connectivity for SIP or H.323 calls,
or without any IP infrastructure.
Setup with LAN and direct connection between the video system and ISDN Link
This is the recommended setup. But there are other options, so see the user documentation for
additional examples: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs
ISDN Link is managed from the video systems web interface. Sign
in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Peripherals.
Requirements:
•
The ISDN Link must be running IL1.1.7 software or later
•
The video system (codec) must be running CE9.3 software or
later. The ISDN Link must be re-paired with the video system
after the video system has been converted from TC software
to CE software.
•
The video endpoint must have IPv6 enabled in the web
interface or API in order to communicate with the ISDN Link
•
Observe the network topology in the ISDN Link Installation
Guide in order to guarantee a successful installation
•
The video system and ISDN Link must be on the same subnet.
If the endpoint or ISDN Link are assigned new IP addresses
they will only remain paired as long as they are kept in the
same subnet.
LAN
PC/Laptop for system
management
Video system
(represented by
an SX80 codec)
ISDN Link,
rear panel
Limitations:
•
Video systems that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud
service are not able to use ISDN Link.
BRI
1-4
Setup and configuration
When converting the video system from TC (TC6 or later) to
CE software (CE9.3 or later) the ISDN Link will automatically be
unpaired due to security reasons.
PRI
NET
LAN
port
Video
system
port
Power
More information about ISDN Link (Release Notes, Installation
Guide, Administrator Guide, API Guide, Compliance and Safety
guide) is found here: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
97
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 4
Maintenance
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
98
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Upgrade the system software
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Upgrading from TC to CE software
Upgrading from CE8 to CE9
CE software is the evolution of TC software. We recommend
that you upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later before you upgrade to CE
software.
The MultiStream feature with Cisco TelePresence Server is
deprecated in CE9.
It is important that you read about upgrade requirements and
functionality changes before you upgrade to CE software.
Also check that your environment supports the changes. We
recommend reading the Software Release Notes carefully.
Also, some features that were available from the Touch controller
in CE8, are not available in the first CE9 releases. Read the
Software Release Notes for details before you upgrade.
If you don’t take into account these considerations, upgrading to
CE can leave you with a non-functioning deployment that requires
you to downgrade.
Upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later
Install CE9?
No
Is your video
system running
TC7.3.6 or later?
Yes
Use TC7.x software
Yes
Do you need TC
features that are
not supported in CE
software?*
TC
Which software
version is the video
system running?
CE
Do you need
MultiStream with
Cisco TelePresence
Server?
Yes
Use CE8.x software
No
*
CE software does not support the
following features and products:
-- MultiWay conferencing
-- CTMS conferencing
-- MediaNet
-- Displays that do not support 16:9
or 16:10 resolution
-- Custom video layouts using TC
Console.
Update your application
to the new API commands
before installing CE9
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Yes
Are you currently
using the API (for
example Crestron or
AMX)?
No
No
Install CE9
99
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Upgrade the system software
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
About software versions
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Software Upgrade.
This video conference system is using CE
software. The version described in this
document is CE9.5.x.
Download new software
Software release notes
For software download, go to the Cisco Download
Software web page, and select your product:
► https://software.cisco.com/download/home
For a complete overview of the news and changes, we
recommend reading the Software Release Notes (CE9).
Each software version has a unique file name. The format of
the file name is “s52020ce9_5_x.pkg”.
Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/
collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsdproducts-support-series-home.html
Install new software
Download the appropriate software package and store it on your
computer. This is a .pkg file. Don’t change the file name.
1. Click Browse... and find the .pkg file that contains the new
software.
The software version will be detected and shown.
2. Click Install software to start the installation process.
Check new software version
The complete installation normally take no longer than 15 minutes.
You can follow the progress on the web page. The video system
restarts automatically after the installation.
When you have selected a file, the
software version is shown here
You must sign in anew in order to continue working with the web
interface after the restart.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
100
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Add option keys
About option keys
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Option Keys.
Your video system may or may not have
one or more software options installed. In
order to activate the optional functionality
the corresponding option key must be
present on the video system.
You see a list of all option keys, also the ones that are not
installed on your video system.
Contact your Cisco representative for information about how to
get option keys for the uninstalled options.
Each video system has unique option
keys.
Option keys are not deleted when
performing a software upgrade or factory
reset, so they need to be added only
once.
The video system’s serial number
You need the video system’s serial number
when ordering an option key.
Add an option key
1. Enter an Option Key in the text input field.
2. Click Add option key.
If you want to add more than one option key,
repeat these steps for all keys.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
101
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
System status
System information overview
Detailed system status
Sign in to the web interface to see the System Information page.
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Status in
order to find more detailed status information*.
This page shows the product type, system name and basic
information about the hardware, software, installed options and
network address. Registration status for the video networks (SIP
and H.323) is included, as well as the number/URI to use when
making a call to the system.
Search for a status entry
Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All entries that
contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Entries that have
these letters in their value space are also shown.
Select a category and navigate to the correct status
The system status is grouped in categories. Choose a category in
the left pane to show the related status to the right.
*
The status shown in the illustration serve as an example. The status of your
system may be different.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
102
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Run diagnostics
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Diagnostics.
The diagnostics page lists the status for some common
sources of errors*.
Errors and critical issues are clearly marked in red color;
warnings are yellow.
*
Run diagnostics
Click Re-run diagnostics to ensure that
the list is up to date.
Leave standby mode
Click Wake up the system to wake
up a video system that is in standby
mode.
The messages shown in the illustration serve as examples. Your system
may show other information.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
103
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Download log files
About log files
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to
Maintenance > System Logs.
The log files are Cisco specific debug
files which may be requested by the
Cisco support organization if you need
technical support.
Download all log files
Start extended logging
Click Download logs archive...
and follow the instructions.
Click Start extended logging....
An anonymized call history
is included in the log files by
default.
Use the drop down list if
you want to exclude the call
history from the log files, or
if you want to include the full
call history (non-anonymous
caller/callee).
Open/save one log file
Click the file name to open the
log file in the web browser;
right click to save the file on
the computer.
Extended logging lasts for
3 or 10 minutes, depending
on whether full capture of
network traffic is included or
not.
Click Stop extended logging if
you want to stop the extended
logging before it times out.
As default, the network traffic
is not captured. Use the drop
down menu if you want to
include partial or full capture of
network traffic.
The current log files are time stamped
event log files.
All current log files are archived in a time
stamped historical log file each time the
video system restarts. If the maximum
number of historical log files is reached,
the oldest one will be overwritten.
Extended logging mode
Extended logging mode may be switched
on to help diagnose network issues and
problems during call setup. While in this
mode more information is stored in the
log files.
Extended logging uses more of the video
system’s resources, and may cause the
video system to under-perform. Only use
extended logging mode when you are
troubleshooting an issue.
Refresh a log file list
Click the refresh button for
Current logs or Historical logs
to update the corresponding
lists.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
104
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Create a remote support user
About the remote support
user
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Maintenance > System
Recovery and select the Remote Support User tab.
In cases where you need to diagnose
problems on the video system you can
create a remote support user.
The remote support user should only be enabled for
troubleshooting reasons when instructed by Cisco TAC.
The remote support user is granted read
access to the system and has access to
a limited set of commands that can aid
troubleshooting.
You will need assistance from Cisco
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to
acquire the password for the remote
support user.
Create remote support user
1. Click Create user.
2. Open a case with Cisco TAC.
3. Copy the text in the Token field and send
it to Cisco TAC.
4. Cisco TAC will generate a password.
The remote support user is valid for seven
days, or until it is deleted.
Delete remote support user
Click Delete user.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
105
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Backup and restore configurations and custom elements
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Backup and Restore.
You can include custom elements as well as configurations in a
backup file (zip-format). You can choose which of the following
elements to include in the bundle:
Create a backup file
Additional information
1. Open the Create backup tab.
2. Select the elements you want to include in the backup file.
Elements that currently don’t exist on the video system are
greyed out.
•
Branding images
•
Macros
•
Favorites
•
As default, all settings are included in the backup file.
•
Sign-in banner
•
•
In-room control panels
You can remove one or more settings manually by
deleting them from the list on the web page.
•
Configurations/settings (all or a sub-set)
•
If you want to remove all settings that are specific
to one video system, click Remove system-specific
configurations.
The backup file can either be restored manually from the video
system’s web interface, or you can generalize the backup bundle
so that it can be provisioned across multiple video systems, for
example using Cisco UCM or TMS (see the next chapters).
3. Select which settings - if any - you want to include in the
backup file. Note the following:
This is useful if you are going to restore the backup bundle
on other video systems.
4. Click Download backup to store the elements in a zip-file on
your computer.
Restoring macros
If a backup file that contains macros is
restored on a video system the following
applies:
•
The macro runtime is started or
restarted.
•
The macros are automatically
activated (started).
Restoring branding images
If a backup bundle contains branding
images, the UserInterface Wallpaper
setting is automatically set to Auto.
This means that the branding images
will automatically be displayed, possibly
replacing a custom wallpaper.
The backup file
Restore a backup file
1. Choose the Restore backup tab.
2. Click Browse... and find the backup file you want to restore.
All settings and elements in the backup file will be applied.
The backup file is a zip-file that contains
several files. It is important that the files
are at the top level within the zip-file, and
not include in a folder.
3. Click Upload file to apply the backup.
Some settings may require that you restart the video system
before they take effect.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
106
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
CUCM provisioning of custom elements
A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a
customization template for multiple video systems.
Upload a customization template to the TFTP file
server
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified OS Administration.
2. Navigate to Software Upgrades > TFTP File Management.
The customization template (backup file) may be hosted on either:
•
the CUCM TFTP file service, or
•
a custom web server that can be reached by the video
systems on HTTP or HTTPS.
When a video system get information from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager) about the name and location of a
customization template, the video system will contact the server,
download the file, and restore the custom elements.
SHA512 checksum
Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
of a file by restoring it to a video system
using its web interface.
3. Click Upload File. Enter the name and path of the
customization template in the input field.
1. Sign in to the web interface and
navigate to Maintenance > Backup
and Restore.
4. Click Upload File.
2. Choose the Restore backup tab.
Add customization provisioning information for each
video system
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified CM Administration.
3. Click Browse... and find the file you
want to calculate the checksum for.
Then you can see the SHA512
checksum at the bottom of the page.
2. Navigate to Device > Phone.
Configurations will not be restored on the video system,
even if they are part of the backup file that you use as a
customization template.
3. Fill in the Customization Provisioning fields in the product
specific configuration section of the relevant devices:
•
Customization File: The customization template file name
(for example: backup.zip) *
•
Customization Hash Type: SHA512
•
Cutomization Hash: The SHA512 checksum for the
customization template.
CUCM documentation
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/
support/unified-communications/unifiedcommunications-manager-callmanager/
tsd-products-support-series-home.html
If these fields are not present, you must install a newer Device
Package on CUCM.
4. Click Save and Apply Config to push the configuration to the
video systems.
*
If not using the TFTP Service, you must enter the complete URI for the
customization template: <hostname>:<portnumber>/<path-and-filename>
For example:
• http://host:6970/backup.zip, or
• https://host:6971/backup.zip
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
107
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
TMS provisioning of custom elements
A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a
customization template for multiple video systems.
SHA512 checksum
Create and apply a configuration template
1. Create a configurations template.
2. Add a custom command containing the following XML string in
the configuration template:
The backup file must be hosted on a custom web server that can
be reached by the video systems on HTTP or HTTPS.
<Command>
<Provisioning>
<Service>
<Fetch>
<URL>web-server-address</URL>
<Checksum>checksum</Checksum>
<Origin>origin</Origin>
</Fetch>
</Service>
</Provisioning>
</Command>
When a video system get information from TMS (TelePresence
Management Suite) about the name and location of the backup
file, the video system will contact the server, download the file,
and restore the custom elements.
Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
of a file by restoring it to a video system
using its web interface.
1. Sign in to the web interface and
navigate to Maintenance > Backup
and Restore.
2. Choose the Restore backup tab.
3. Click Browse... and find the file you
want to calculate the checksum for.
Then you can see the SHA512
checksum at the bottom of the page.
where
web-server-address: The URI to the backup file (for
example, http://host/backup.zip).
checksum: The SHA512 checksum of the backup file.
origin: Provisioning *
3. Select the video systems you want to push the configuration
template to, and click Set on systems.
Read the ► Cisco TMS administrator guide for details how
to create TMS configurations templates and make custom
commands.
*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
If not setting this parameter to Provisioning, also configurations that are part of
the backup file will be pushed to the video system. If the backup file contains
configurations that are specific to one video system, for example static IP
addresses, system name, and contact information, you may and up with video
systems that you cannot reach.
108
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Revert to the previously used software image
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
System Recovery.
We recommend you to back up the log files, configurations, and
custom elements of the video system before you swap to the
previously used software image.
About the previously used
software image
Back up log files, configurations and custom elements
If there is a severe problem with the video
system, switching to the previously used
software image may help solving the
problem.
1. Select the Backup tab.
2. Click Download logs and follow the instructions to save the log
files on your computer.
3. Click Download backup and follow the instructions to save the
backup bundle on your computer.
If the system has not been factory reset
since the last software upgrade, the
previously used software image still
resides on the system. You do not have to
download the software again.
Revert to the previously used software image
Only administrators, or when in contact with Cisco technical
support, should perform this procedure.
1. Select the Software Recovery Swap tab.
2. Click Switch to software: cex.y.z..., where x.y.z indicates the
software version.
3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have
changed your mind.
Wait while the system resets. The system restarts automatically
when finished. This procedure may take a few minutes.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
109
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Factory reset the video system
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 3)
If there is a severe problem with the video system, the last resort
may be to reset it to its default factory settings.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Always consider reverting to the previously used software
image before performing a factory reset. In many situations this
will recover the system. Read about software swapping in the
► Revert to the previously used software image chapter.
We recommend that you use the web interface or user interface
to factory reset the video system. If these interfaces are not
available, use the reset pin-hole .
A factory reset implies:
•
Call logs are deleted.
•
Passphrases are reset to default.
•
All system parameters are reset to default values.
•
All files that have been uploaded to the system are deleted.
This includes, but is not limited to, custom wallpaper,
certificates, and favorites lists.
•
The previous (inactive) software image is deleted.
•
Option keys are not affected.
The video system restarts automatically after the factory reset. It
is using the same software image as before.
We recommend that you back up the log files, configurations,
and custom elements of the video system before you perform a
factory reset; otherwise these data will be lost.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
110
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset the video system (page 2 of 3)
Factory reset using the web interface
Factory reset from the user interface
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
System Recovery.
1. Select the Factory Reset tab, and read the provided
information carefully.
2. Click Perform a factory reset....
3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have
changed your mind.
4. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface.
Back up log files,
configurations, and custom
elements
Sign in to the web interface and navigate
to Maintenance > System Recovery.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Factory reset.
4. Select Reset to confirm your choice, or Back if you have
changed your mind.
5. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.
111
Back up log files, configurations,
and custom element
1. Select the Backup tab.
2. Click Download logs and follow the
instructions to save the log files on
your computer.
3. Click Download backup and follow
the instructions to save the backup
bundle on your computer.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset the video system (page 3 of 3)
Factory reset using the reset button
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
1. Remove the left side cover of the video system to get
access to the codec connector panel.
The cover snaps to magnets.
2. Use a paper clip (or similar) to press and hold the
recessed reset button until the screen turns black
(approximately 10 seconds). Then release the button.
3. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome
screen.
Reset button
(pin hole)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
112
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset Cisco Touch 10
This chapter applies to the new Touch 10 controller that was
launched late 2017 (Cisco Touch 10). This device is identified
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.
See the next page for the older version.
1. Open the small cover at the rear to find the reset button.
2. Press and hold the reset button until the mute button at the
front starts blinking (approximately 5 seconds). Then release
the button.
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings
and restarts.
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when
in contact with the Cisco support organization.
If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it
receives a new configuration automatically from the video
system.
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is
reverted to factory defaults.
If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to
the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives
a new configuration automatically from the video system.
About pairing and how to
connect Touch 10 to the
video system
In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
Touch 10 must either be directly
connected to the codec, or paired to the
codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
remote pairing.
Read about pairing and how to connect
Touch 10 to the video system in the
► Connect the Touch 10 controller
chapter.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Open the cover to
find the reset button
Reset button
Mute button starts blinking
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
113
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10
This chapter applies to the first Touch 10 controller (Cisco
TelePresence Touch 10). This device has no logo on front.
See the previous page for the newer version that was
launched late 2017.
1. Locate the Mute and Volume down buttons.
2. Press and hold the Mute button until it starts blinking (red and
green). It takes approximately 10 seconds.
3. Press the Volume down button twice.
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings
and restarts.
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when
in contact with the Cisco support organization.
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is
reverted to factory defaults.
If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it
receives a new configuration automatically from the video
system.
If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to
the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives
a new configuration automatically from the video system.
About pairing and how to
connect Touch 10 to the
video system
In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
Touch 10 must either be directly
connected to the codec, or paired to the
codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
remote pairing.
Read about pairing and how to connect
Touch 10 to the video system in the
► Connect the Touch 10 controller
chapter.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Mute
Volume down
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
114
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Capture user interface screenshots
About user interface
screenshots
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
User Interface Screenshots.
You can capture screenshots both of
a Touch controller that is connected to
the video system, and of the on-screen
display (menus, indicators and messages
on the main display).
Delete screenshots
If you want to delete all screenshots,
click Remove all.
To delete just one screenshot, click
the × button for that screenshot.
Capture a screenshot
Click Take screenshot of Touch Panel to
capture a screenshot of the Touch controller,
or click Take screenshot of OSD to capture a
screenshot of the on-screen display.
The screenshot displays in the area below
the buttons. It may take up to 30 seconds
before the screenshot is ready.
All captured snapshots are included
in the list above the buttons. Click the
screenshot ID to display the image.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
115
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Chapter 5
System settings
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
116
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Overview of the system settings
Audio settings................................................................................................................ 123
Audio DefaultVolume.......................................................................................................... 123
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level................................................................................................. 123
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode................................................................................................ 123
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo.......................................... 123
Audio Input Line [1..4] Channel...........................................................................................124
Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer ID..................................................................................... 123
Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer Mode............................................................................... 123
Audio Input Line [1..4] Level................................................................................................124
Audio Input Line [1..4] Mode................................................................................................124
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo..........................................124
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource...............................................124
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Dereverberation............................................. 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Mode..............................................................124
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl NoiseReduction............................................. 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer ID......................................................................... 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer Mode................................................................... 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Level................................................................................... 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Mode.................................................................................. 125
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Type.................................................................................... 126
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo............................ 126
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource.................................. 126
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain...............................................................................127
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [1..8] Mode...................................... 126
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [1..4] Mode.................................................127
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled..................................................................................... 126
Audio Output Line [1..6] Channel........................................................................................127
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay DelayMs..............................................................................127
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay Mode...................................................................................127
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID...................................................................................127
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode............................................................................ 128
Audio Output Line [1..6] Level............................................................................................ 128
Audio Output Line [1..6] Mode............................................................................................ 128
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone..................................................................................... 128
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume................................................................................. 128
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume............................................................................................ 129
Audio Ultrasound Mode..................................................................................................... 128
In the following pages you will find a complete list of the system
settings which are configured from the Setup > Configuration
page on the web interface.
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the video
system then sign in.
How to find the IP address
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner
of the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by About this device.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
117
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference DefaultCall Protocol....................................................................................... 138
Conference DefaultCall Rate.............................................................................................. 138
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout........................................................................ 138
Conference Encryption Mode............................................................................................ 138
Conference FarEndControl Mode...................................................................................... 138
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability...................................................................... 139
Conference FarEndMessage Mode................................................................................... 139
Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode............................................................................141
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate...................................................................................... 139
Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate............................................................................... 139
Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate.............................................................................. 140
Conference MaxTransmitCallRate...................................................................................... 139
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode.................................................................... 140
Conference Multipoint Mode............................................................................................. 140
Conference MultiStream Mode.......................................................................................... 140
Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold.......................................................................141
Conference Presentation RelayQuality...............................................................................141
Conference VideoBandwidth Mode....................................................................................141
CallHistory settings........................................................................................................ 130
CallHistory Mode................................................................................................................ 130
Cameras settings........................................................................................................... 131
Cameras Camera [1..7] AssignedSerialNumber..................................................................131
Cameras Camera [1..7] Backlight DefaultMode...................................................................131
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness DefaultLevel.................................................................131
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness Mode...........................................................................131
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Level................................................................................ 132
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Mode............................................................................... 132
Cameras Camera [1..7] MotorMoveDetection.................................................................... 133
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Level...................................................................... 133
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Mode..................................................................... 133
Cameras Camera [n] Flip.................................................................................................... 132
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode..................................................................................... 132
Cameras Camera [n] Mirror................................................................................................ 133
Cameras PowerLine Frequency......................................................................................... 133
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan.................................................................. 134
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt................................................................... 134
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom............................................................... 134
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector.................................................................................. 134
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled...................................................................................... 134
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus.......................................................... 135
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone............................................................................... 135
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus..................................................................................... 135
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup........................................................................................ 136
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft................................................. 136
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight............................................... 136
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode.......................................................... 136
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode............................................................................................ 135
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode.............................................................................. 136
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode........................................................................ 136
FacilityService settings.................................................................................................. 142
FacilityService Service [1..5] CallType................................................................................142
FacilityService Service [1..5] Name....................................................................................142
FacilityService Service [1..5] Number.................................................................................142
FacilityService Service [1..5] Type......................................................................................142
GPIO settings................................................................................................................. 143
GPIO Pin [1..4] Mode.......................................................................................................... 143
H323 settings................................................................................................................. 144
H323 Authentication LoginName....................................................................................... 144
H323 Authentication Mode................................................................................................ 144
H323 Authentication Password......................................................................................... 144
H323 CallSetup Mode........................................................................................................ 144
H323 Encryption KeySize................................................................................................... 145
H323 Gatekeeper Address................................................................................................ 145
H323 H323Alias E164........................................................................................................ 145
H323 H323Alias ID............................................................................................................. 145
H323 NAT Address............................................................................................................ 146
H323 NAT Mode................................................................................................................ 145
H323 PortAllocation........................................................................................................... 146
Conference settings...................................................................................................... 137
Conference ActiveControl Mode....................................................................................... 137
Conference AutoAnswer Delay.......................................................................................... 137
Conference AutoAnswer Mode......................................................................................... 137
Conference AutoAnswer Mute.......................................................................................... 137
Conference CallProtocolIPStack........................................................................................ 137
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System
System settings
settings
118
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv NTP........................................................................................ 154
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Signalling................................................................................ 154
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Video...................................................................................... 153
Network [1..1] QoS Mode................................................................................................... 153
Network [1..1] RemoteAccess Allow................................................................................... 155
Network [1..1] Speed.......................................................................................................... 155
Network [1..1] TrafficControl Mode..................................................................................... 155
Network [1..1] VLAN Voice Mode....................................................................................... 155
Network [1..1] VLAN Voice VlanId....................................................................................... 155
Logging settings............................................................................................................ 147
Logging External Mode.......................................................................................................147
Logging External Protocol...................................................................................................147
Logging External Server Address.......................................................................................147
Logging External Server Port..............................................................................................147
Logging Mode.....................................................................................................................147
Macros settings............................................................................................................. 148
Macros AutoStart............................................................................................................... 148
Macros Mode..................................................................................................................... 148
NetworkServices settings.............................................................................................. 156
NetworkServices CDP Mode............................................................................................. 156
NetworkServices H323 Mode........................................................................................... 156
NetworkServices HTTP Mode........................................................................................... 156
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName........................................................................ 156
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode................................................................................. 157
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl............................................................................... 157
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password.......................................................................... 157
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url...................................................................................... 157
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode.............................................................................. 157
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL................................................................................ 157
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion...................................................... 158
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity............................................................. 158
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate............................................................... 158
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate............................................................. 158
NetworkServices NTP Mode............................................................................................. 158
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Address..................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SIP Mode............................................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName....................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address..................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SNMP Mode.......................................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact.......................................................................... 159
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation......................................................................... 160
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey.............................................................................. 160
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm.......................................................................... 160
NetworkServices SSH Mode............................................................................................. 160
NetworkServices Telnet Mode.......................................................................................... 160
NetworkServices UPnP Mode............................................................................................161
Network settings............................................................................................................ 149
Network [1..1] DNS DNSSEC Mode.................................................................................... 149
Network [1..1] DNS Domain Name...................................................................................... 149
Network [1..1] DNS Server [1..3] Address........................................................................... 149
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity.................................................................... 150
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Md5.................................................................................... 150
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Peap....................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls........................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls...................................................................................... 150
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Identity....................................................................................... 150
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Mode......................................................................................... 149
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Password................................................................................... 150
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X TlsVerify..................................................................................... 149
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate.................................................................. 150
Network [1..1] IPStack..........................................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IPv4 Address................................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IPv4 Assignment...........................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IPv4 Gateway................................................................................................151
Network [1..1] IPv4 SubnetMask......................................................................................... 152
Network [1..1] IPv6 Address............................................................................................... 152
Network [1..1] IPv6 Assignment.......................................................................................... 152
Network [1..1] IPv6 DHCPOptions...................................................................................... 152
Network [1..1] IPv6 Gateway............................................................................................... 152
Network [1..1] MTU............................................................................................................. 153
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Audio...................................................................................... 153
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Data........................................................................................ 154
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6.................................................................................. 154
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System
System settings
settings
119
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
RTP settings................................................................................................................... 171
RTP Ports Range Start........................................................................................................171
RTP Ports Range Stop........................................................................................................171
RTP Video Ports Range Start..............................................................................................171
RTP Video Ports Range Stop..............................................................................................171
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout........................................................................................161
NetworkServices WelcomeText..........................................................................................161
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode........................................................................................161
Peripherals settings....................................................................................................... 162
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience...................................................... 162
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing...................................................... 162
Peripherals Profile Cameras.............................................................................................. 162
Peripherals Profile ControlSystems................................................................................... 162
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels........................................................................................ 163
Security settings............................................................................................................ 172
Security Audit Logging Mode.............................................................................................172
Security Audit OnError Action.............................................................................................172
Security Audit Server Address...........................................................................................172
Security Audit Server Port..................................................................................................173
Security Audit Server PortAssignment...............................................................................173
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime.......................................................................173
Security Session InactivityTimeout.....................................................................................173
Security Session MaxFailedLogins.....................................................................................173
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser.............................................................................173
Security Session MaxTotalSessions...................................................................................174
Security Session ShowLastLogon......................................................................................174
Phonebook settings....................................................................................................... 164
Phonebook Server [1..1] ID................................................................................................. 164
Phonebook Server [1..1] Type............................................................................................ 164
Phonebook Server [1..1] URL............................................................................................. 164
Provisioning settings...................................................................................................... 165
Provisioning Connectivity.................................................................................................. 165
Provisioning ExternalManager Address............................................................................. 165
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress............................................................... 165
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain.............................................................................. 166
Provisioning ExternalManager Path................................................................................... 166
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol............................................................................. 165
Provisioning LoginName.................................................................................................... 166
Provisioning Mode............................................................................................................. 166
Provisioning Password....................................................................................................... 167
SerialPort settings......................................................................................................... 175
SerialPort BaudRate............................................................................................................175
SerialPort LoginRequired....................................................................................................175
SerialPort Mode..................................................................................................................175
SIP settings.................................................................................................................... 176
SIP ANAT............................................................................................................................176
SIP Authentication Password..............................................................................................176
SIP Authentication UserName............................................................................................176
SIP DefaultTransport...........................................................................................................176
SIP DisplayName.................................................................................................................176
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate................................................................................................... 177
SIP Ice Mode...................................................................................................................... 177
SIP Line.............................................................................................................................. 177
SIP ListenPort.................................................................................................................... 177
SIP Mailbox........................................................................................................................ 177
SIP MinimumTLSVersion.....................................................................................................178
SIP PreferredIPMedia..........................................................................................................178
SIP PreferredIPSignaling.....................................................................................................178
Proximity settings.......................................................................................................... 168
Proximity Mode.................................................................................................................. 168
Proximity Services CallControl.......................................................................................... 168
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients.................................................................. 168
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients...................................................................... 168
RoomAnalytics settings................................................................................................. 169
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall............................................................................. 169
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector.......................................................................... 169
RoomReset settings....................................................................................................... 170
RoomReset Control.............................................................................................................170
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System
System settings
settings
120
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
UserInterface Language.................................................................................................... 188
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator............................................................................. 188
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage.............................................................................. 188
UserInterface OSD Output................................................................................................. 189
UserInterface Security Mode............................................................................................. 189
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode.................................................................................... 189
UserInterface Wallpaper.................................................................................................... 189
SIP Proxy [1..4] Address......................................................................................................178
SIP TlsVerify........................................................................................................................178
SIP Turn DiscoverMode......................................................................................................178
SIP Turn DropRflx................................................................................................................179
SIP Turn Password..............................................................................................................179
SIP Turn Server...................................................................................................................179
SIP Turn UserName............................................................................................................179
SIP Type..............................................................................................................................179
SIP URI................................................................................................................................179
UserManagement settings............................................................................................. 190
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter................................................................................ 190
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group.............................................................................. 190
UserManagement LDAP Attribute...................................................................................... 190
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN...................................................................................... 190
UserManagement LDAP Encryption.................................................................................. 190
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion....................................................................191
UserManagement LDAP Mode...........................................................................................191
UserManagement LDAP Server Address...........................................................................191
UserManagement LDAP Server Port..................................................................................191
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate................................................................191
Standby settings............................................................................................................ 180
Standby BootAction........................................................................................................... 180
Standby Control................................................................................................................. 180
Standby Delay.................................................................................................................... 180
Standby PowerSave............................................................................................................181
Standby StandbyAction..................................................................................................... 180
Standby WakeupAction...................................................................................................... 180
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection................................................................................. 180
SystemUnit settings....................................................................................................... 182
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced............................................................................. 182
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode.................................................................................... 182
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url......................................................................................... 182
SystemUnit Name.............................................................................................................. 182
Video settings................................................................................................................ 192
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition........................................................................... 192
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local....................................................................................... 192
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote................................................................................... 193
Video DefaultMainSource.................................................................................................. 193
Video Input Connector [1..4] PresentationSelection.......................................................... 195
Video Input Connector [1..4] RGBQuantizationRange........................................................ 196
Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl CameraId.................................................... 193
Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl Mode........................................................... 193
Video Input Connector [1..5] InputSourceType.................................................................. 194
Video Input Connector [1..5] Name.................................................................................... 194
Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Profile....................................................... 194
Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps........................................ 195
Video Input Connector [1..5] Quality.................................................................................. 196
Video Input Connector [1..5] Visibility................................................................................ 196
Video Input Connector [4..4] DviType................................................................................ 194
Video Input Connector [5] SignalType............................................................................... 196
Video Monitors................................................................................................................... 197
Time settings................................................................................................................. 183
Time DateFormat............................................................................................................... 183
Time TimeFormat............................................................................................................... 183
Time WorkDay End............................................................................................................ 185
Time WorkDay Start........................................................................................................... 185
Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek..................................................................................... 185
Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek..................................................................................... 186
Time Zone.......................................................................................................................... 184
UserInterface settings.................................................................................................... 187
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification........................................................ 187
UserInterface ContactInfo Type......................................................................................... 187
UserInterface CustomMessage......................................................................................... 187
UserInterface KeyTones Mode........................................................................................... 188
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System
System settings
settings
121
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location HorizontalOffset.................................................. 198
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location VerticalOffset...................................................... 198
Video Output Connector [1..3] MonitorRole....................................................................... 199
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode............................................................................. 197
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution............................................................................. 199
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange......................................................... 199
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition.............................................................................. 199
Video Presentation DefaultSource..................................................................................... 200
Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode............................................................................ 200
Video Selfview Default Mode............................................................................................. 200
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole.............................................................................. 200
Video Selfview Default PIPPosition.................................................................................... 201
Video Selfview OnCall Duration......................................................................................... 201
Video Selfview OnCall Mode............................................................................................. 201
Experimental settings.................................................................................................... 202
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
122
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio settings
Audio DefaultVolume
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Define the default volume for the speakers. The volume is set to this value when you switch
on or restart the video system. Use the controls on the user interface to change the volume
while it is running. You may also use API commands (xCommand Audio Volume) to change
the volume while the video system is running, and to reset to default value.
This setting applies to HDMI [2..3] for single camera systems, and to HDMI [3] for dual
camera systems.
Use this setting to decide whether to stop the audio playback of a connected presentation
source if that presentation source is not currently shown on-screen, or to always playback
the audio as long as the presentation source is connected.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: 50
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (0..100)
Range: Select a value between 1 and 100. This corresponds to the dB range from -34.5
dB to 15 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. If set to 0 the audio is switched off.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Audio is played, locally and to far end, as long as a presentation source is
connected; you do not have to present the HDMI input source.
On: Audio is played, locally and to far end, only when the connected presentation source
is shown on-screen.
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level
This setting applies to HDMI [2..3] for single camera systems, and to HDMI [3] for dual
camera systems.
Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer ID
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
Select the equalizer ID of the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Set the equalizer ID.
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
Audio Input Line [1..4] Equalizer Mode
This setting applies to HDMI [2..3] for single camera systems, and to HDMI [3] for dual
camera systems.
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Define if the audio on the HDMI input connector shall be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
Off: Disable audio on the HDMI input.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
On: Enable audio on the HDMI input.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
123
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Audio Input Line [1..4] Level
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is
presented or not.
Set the gain on the Line input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the output
level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Default value: Line[1,2]: On Line[3,4]: Off
Example: If your audio source has a maximum output level of 8 dBu, then you should set the
gain to 22 dBu - 8 dBu = 14 dB.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The audio source is not associated with a video source. The audio will be played
locally and to far end regardless of whether the video source is presented.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: The audio source is associated with a video source. The audio will be played (locally
and to far end) when the associated video source is presented. The audio will be muted
when the video source is not presented.
Value space: Integer (0..24)
Default value: 10
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Audio Input Line [1..4] Mode
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector.
Define the mode for the audio input line.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Line[1,2]: 4 Line[3,4]: 1
Default value: On
Value space: 1/2/3/4/5
Value space: Off/On
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Off: Disable the Audio Line input.
On: Enable the Audio Line input.
Audio Input Line [1..4] Channel
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Mode
Define whether the audio source on the line input is a mono signal or part of a multichannel
signal.
Default value: Left
The echo canceller continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room, and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in the
audio conditions are significant, the echo canceller may take a second or two to re-adjust.
Value space: Left/Mono/Right
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Left: The Audio Line input signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Default value: On
Mono: The Audio Line input signal is a mono signal.
Value space: Off/On
Right: The Audio Line input signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Off: Turn off the echo control. Recommended if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
On: Turn on the echo control. Recommended, in general, to prevent the far end from
hearing their own audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
124
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl Dereverberation
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer Mode
The system has built-in signal processing to reduce the effect of room reverberation.
Dereverberation requires that Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
Define the equalizer mode for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
Off: Turn off the dereverberation.
On: Enable the equalizer for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
On: Turn on the dereverberation.
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Level
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] EchoControl NoiseReduction
Set the gain on the Microphone input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the
output level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The system has built-in noise reduction, which reduces stationary background noise, for
example noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc. In addition, a high pass filter
(Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise. Noise reduction requires that Audio Input
Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Note that unprocessed speech signals typically contain significant level variations, making it
very important to allow for sufficient signal headroom.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain, is 22 dBu.
Default value: On
Example: If your microphone has a maximum output level of -44 dBu, then you should set
the gain to 22 dBu - (-44 dBu) = 66 dB.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Turn off the noise reduction.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: Turn on the noise reduction. Recommended in the presence of low frequency noise.
Default value: 58
Value space: Integer (0..70)
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer ID
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Select the equalizer ID of the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Disable or enable audio on the microphone connector.
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the equalizer ID.
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the audio input microphone connector.
On: Enable the audio input microphone connector.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
125
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Type
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
The microphone connectors are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone
connector can be set to line or microphone mode.
Define the microphone mute behavior on the video system.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: True
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Microphone
Value space: True/InCallOnly
Value space: Line/Microphone
True: Muting of audio is always available.
Microphone: Select Microphone when you have 48 V Phantom voltage and the preamplification is On.
InCallOnly: Muting of audio is only available when the device is in a call. When Idle it is
not possible to mute the microphone. This is useful when an external telephone service/
audio system is connected via the codec and is to be available when the codec is not
in a call. When set to InCallOnly this will prevent the audio-system from being muted by
mistake.
Line: Select Line when you have a standard balanced line input. The phantom voltage
and pre-amplification is Off.
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation
MuteOnInactiveVideo
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [1..8] Mode
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each microphone. The
signals from all microphones with Mode = On will be mixed and fed to the selected
MicrophoneReinforcement outputs. Also consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement
Output Line Mode setting.
The microphone can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is
presented or not. By default, audio is not muted.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: No video source is associated.
On: The microphone signal will be fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement
outputs, as well as to the far end.
On: A video source is associated, and the audio will be muted if the associated video
source is not displayed.
Off: The microphone signal will be sent only to the far end. It will not be fed to the
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation
VideoInputSource
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Value space: 1/2/3/4/5
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
126
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [1..4] Mode
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay DelayMs
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each line output. If Mode = On, the
line output will add the microphone reinforcement mix to its ordinary output signal. Also
consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone Mode setting.
To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each audio line output with an extra delay
that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external
loudspeakers. The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay on the HDMI
output, as defined in the Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Default value: 0
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Integer (0..290)
On: This output will deliver far end audio, local presentation audio and the microphone
reinforcement mix.
The delay in milliseconds.
Off: This output will deliver far end audio and local presentation audio.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay Mode
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain
You may add extra delay to an audio line output with the Audio Output Line [n] Delay
DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or
a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on the HDMI output (typically
introduced by the connected TV).
The gain (in dB) that will be applied to the mixed microphone signal that is fed to the
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: -54
Default value: Fixed
Value space: Integer (-54..15)
Value space: Fixed/RelativeToHDMI
Use this gain to adjust the level of microphone signal that should be fed to the local
output. The value -54 means "Off", and no signal will be fed from the microphone to the
output.
Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of
millisecond.
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the
detected delay on the HDMI output. The actual delay is HDMI-delay + DelayMs. The
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Channel
Define whether the Audio Line output is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID
Default value: Line[1,3,5]: Left Line[2,4,6]: Right
Select the equalizer ID for the audio source that is connected to the output line.
Value space: Left/Mono/Right
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Left: The Audio Line output signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Default value: 1
Mono: The Audio Line output signal is a mono signal.
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Right: The Audio Line output signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Set the equalizer ID.
127
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the output line.
Define which ringtone to use for incoming calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Off
Default value: Sunrise
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Sunrise/Mischief/Ripples/Reflections/Vibes/Delight/Evolve/Playful/Ascent/
Calculation/Mellow/Ringer
Off: No equalizer.
Select a ringtone from the list.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio output line.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Level
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume
Set the gain on the Line output connector. The gain should be adjusted to fit the audio input
level of the connected device. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
Define the ring volume for incoming calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The maximum output level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Default value: 30
Example: If he connected audio device has max input level 10 dBu, then you should set the
gain to 10 dBu - 22 dBu = -12 dB.
Value space: Integer (0..100)
Range: The value goes in steps of 5 from 0 to 100 (from -34.5 dB to 15 dB). Volume 0 =
Off.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: -10
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Audio Ultrasound Mode
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Keep the setting at its default value.
Audio Output Line [1..6] Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Dynamic
Define the mode for the audio line output.
Value space: Dynamic/Static
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Dynamic: The video system adjusts the ultrasound volume dynamically. The volume may
vary up to the maximum level as defined in the Audio Ultrasound Volume MaxVolume
setting.
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Static: Use only if advised by Cisco.
Off: Disable the audio line output.
On: Enable the audio line output.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
128
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Set the maximum volume of the
ultrasound pairing message.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 66
Value space: Integer (0..90)
Select a value in the specified range. If set to 0, the ultrasound is switched off.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
129
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
CallHistory settings
CallHistory Mode
Determine whether or not information about calls that are placed or received are stored,
including missed calls and calls that are not answered (call history). This determines
whether or not the calls appear in the Recents list in the user interfaces.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: New entries are not added to the call history.
On: New entries are stored in the call history list.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
130
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Cameras settings
Cameras Camera [1..7] AssignedSerialNumber
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness Mode
The camera ID is the number n in Camera [n]. By default, the camera ID is assigned
automatically to a camera. If EDID information is not passed on from the camera to the
codec, the camera ID is not persistent after a reboot. This means that a camera may get a
new camera ID when the codec (video system) is restarted.
Define the camera brightness mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
You should use the Cameras Camera AssignedSerialNumber setting to cater for
configurations where the codec does not receive EDID information from multiple cameras.
This setting allows you to manually assign a camera ID to a camera by associating the
camera ID with the camera's serial number. The setting is persistent until the codec is
factory reset.
Value space: Auto/Manual
Auto: The camera brightness is automatically set by the system.
Manual: Enable manual control of the camera brightness. The brightness level is set
using the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel setting.
Typical situations where the codec does not receive EDID information are: when you
connect a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera using 3G-SDI; when you connect a
Cisco TelePresence Precision 40 (Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p4xS2) camera;
when you use an HDMI repeater that does not pass on EDID information.
Cameras Camera [1..7] Brightness DefaultLevel
Define the brightness level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode to be set to
Manual.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: String (0, 20)
Default value: 20
The camera's serial number.
Value space: Integer (1..31)
The brightness level.
Cameras Camera [1..7] Backlight DefaultMode
This configuration turns backlight compensation on or off. Backlight compensation is
useful when there is much light behind the persons in the room. Without compensation the
persons will easily appear very dark to the far end.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Turn off the camera backlight compensation.
On: Turn on the camera backlight compensation.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
131
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Mode
This setting applies to Camera [2..7] for single camera systems, and to Camera [3..7] for dual
camera systems.
This setting enables gamma corrections. Gamma describes the nonlinear relationship
between image pixels and monitor brightness.
With Flip mode (vertical flip) you can flip the image upside down. Flipping applies both to
the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Manual
Default value: Auto
Auto: Auto is the default and the recommended setting.
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Manual: In manual mode the gamma value is changed with the gamma level setting, ref.
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level.
Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically
flipped. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not, the
image is not changed.
Cameras Camera [1..7] Gamma Level
Off: Display the image on screen the normal way.
On: Display the image flipped upside down. This setting is used when a camera is
mounted upside down, but cannot automatically detect which way it is mounted.
By setting the Gamma Level you can select which gamma correction table to use. This
setting may be useful in difficult lighting conditions, where changes to the brightness setting
does not provide satisfactory results. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode to be
set to Manual.
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting applies to Camera [2..7] for single camera systems, and to Camera [3..7] for dual
camera systems.
Default value: 0
Define the camera focus mode.
Value space: Integer (0..7)
Define the gamma level.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
Auto: The camera will do continuous auto focusing. It will, more specifically, run auto
focus once a call is connected, after pan, tilt, zoom have changed, and generally when
the camera identifies a change in the scene.
AutoLimited: In most cases this mode will operate the same way as Auto. In some cases
AutoLimited will reduce the focus hunting that may occur. Problematic scenes have large
areas with no or low contrast, for instance a painted wall with no details, or maybe a
partly empty whiteboard. There’s a slightly higher chance of background focus with this
mode, compared to Auto.
Manual: Turn the autofocus off and adjust the camera focus manually.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
132
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Cameras Camera [n] Mirror
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Mode
With Mirror mode (horizontal flip) you can mirror the image on screen. Mirroring applies both
to the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end. Mirroring is automatically
disabled while speaker tracking is on.
Define the camera white balance mode.
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Manual
Default value: Auto
Auto: The camera will continuously adjust the white balance depending on the camera
view.
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Auto: For the integrated cameras, the image is always displayed as other people see
you. For other cameras, if the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image
is automatically mirrored. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside
down or not, the image is not changed.
Manual: Enables manual control of the camera white balance. The white balance level is
set using the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level setting.
Cameras Camera [1..7] Whitebalance Level
Off: For integrated cameras, display the image as you see yourself in a mirror; for other
cameras, display the image as other people see you.
Define the white balance level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode to be
set to manual.
On: For integrated cameras, display the image as other people see you; for other
cameras, display the image as you see yourself in a mirror.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Cameras Camera [1..7] MotorMoveDetection
Value space: Integer (1..16)
The white balance level.
This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p12x camera.
If adjusting the camera position by hand you can configure whether the camera should keep
its new position or return to the preset or position it had before.
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
If your camera supports power line frequency anti-flickering, the camera is able to
compensate for any flicker noise from the electrical power supply. You should set this
camera configuration based on your power line frequency. If your camera supports auto
detection of line frequency, you can select the Auto option in the configuration.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: When the camera position is adjusted manually the camera will keep this position
until adjusted again. WARNING: If you manually tilt the camera, the camera will not
register the new pan and tilt values since there is no position feedback. This will result in
wrong pan and tilt values when recalling the camera presets subsequently.
All Cisco Precision cameras support both anti-flickering and auto detection of line
frequency. Auto is the default value, so you should change this setting if you have a camera
that does not support auto detection.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: When the camera position is adjusted manually, or the camera detects that the
motors have moved, it will first re-initialize (i.e. go to default position) then return to the
preset/position it had before the camera was adjusted.
Default value: Auto
Value space: 50Hz/60Hz/Auto
50Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 50 Hz.
60Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 60 Hz.
Auto: Allow the camera to detect the power frequency automatically.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
133
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector
Define the pan position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature
is activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking.
Define which video input connector the presenter tracking camera is connected to. Only the
Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter tracking.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (1..5)
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
The video input connector.
The pan position.
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt
Define whether or not the PresenterTrack feature is available for use. Only the Precision 60
camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter tracking.
Define the tilt position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature is
activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: False
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: False/True
Default value: 0
False: The PresenterTrack feature is disabled.
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
True: The PresenterTrack feature is available for use.
The tilt position.
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom
Define the zoom position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature
is activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
The zoom position.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
134
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus
Define whether to enable or disable automatic switching between the Remote Presenter
and Local Presenter modes in the Briefing room scenario (Room Type templates). Automatic
switching implies that the system switches to Local Presenter mode when a person is
detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone, and that the system switches back to the
Remote Presenter mode when the local presenter leaves the stage.
The current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus are stored with a preset. Use this setting
to determine if the camera should refocus or use the focus value that is stored with the
preset.
If this setting is enabled, the Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected status will be
updated when a new person enters the trigger zone.
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter
tracking.
Auto: Whether the camera refocuses or not when selecting a preset, depends on the
camera type.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Enabled
Off: The focus value that is stored with the preset will be used. The camera will not
refocus when selecting a preset.
Value space: Disabled/Enabled
On: The camera will refocus when selecting a preset. The focus value that is stored with
the preset may be overridden.
Disabled: No automatic switching between modes.
Enabled: Automatic switching between the Local Presenter and Remote Presenter
modes.
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
This setting applies only to systems with dual cameras.
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone
The dual camera assembly consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique
that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker. When a change of speaker is
detected, the system can switch automatically between the two cameras to always show
the best camera view. Refer to the Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode setting for
different switching modes.
Define the trigger zone, which corresponds to the area where a person's face must be
detected for presenter tracking to start.
The format is a string of x and y coordinate pairs: "x1,y1,...xn,yn", where the range of x is
(0,1920) and y is (0,1080). Two coordinate pairs define the upper left and lower right corner
of a rectangular trigger zone. More than two coordinate pairs define the vertices of a
polygonal trigger zone.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter
tracking.
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Speaker tracking is switched on. The system will detect people in the room and
automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off
instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Off: Speaker tracking is switched off, and the two cameras operate as individual
cameras.
Value space: String (0..255)
The coordinates for the trigger zone.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
135
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight
This setting applies only when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
Not applicable in this version.
When a person in the room speaks the system will find the person and select the best
camera framing. This is called a closeup and may not include all the persons in the room.
If you want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times you can turn off the
closeup functionality.
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
This setting applies only to systems with dual cameras.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker tracking functionality, thus you
need a camera that supports speaker tracking. When a presenter is standing next to the
whiteboard, the camera will capture both the presenter and the whiteboard if the Snap to
Whiteboard feature is enabled. If the feature is disabled, only the presenter will be captured.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is set up from the Touch controller or web interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the camera framing at all times.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Off
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode
Value space: Off/On
Off: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is disabled.
This setting applies only to systems with a dual camera (speaker tracking), and when
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
On: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is enabled.
The speaker tracking algorithm can react to changes in two modes, one faster than the
other. The mode determines when the camera view will change to a new speaker.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Conservative
Auto: This is the normal tracking mode.
Conservative: The camera view will change to a new speaker later than in normal
tracking mode.
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode
Not applicable in this version.
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft
Not applicable in this version.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
136
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference settings
Conference ActiveControl Mode
Conference AutoAnswer Mute
Active control is a feature that allows conference participants to administer a conference on
Cisco TelePresence Server or Cisco Meeting Server using the video system's interfaces.
Each user can see the participant list, change video layout, disconnect participants, etc.
from the interface. The active control feature is enabled by default, provided that it is
supported by the infrastructure (Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) version
9.1.2 or newer, Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS) version X8.1 or
newer, Cisco Media Server (CMS) version 2.1 or newer). Change this setting if you want to
disable the active control features.
Define if the microphone shall be muted when an incoming call is automatically answered.
Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The incoming call will not be muted.
On: The incoming call will be muted when automatically answered.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Conference AutoAnswer Delay
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Active control is enabled when supported by the infrastructure.
Define how long (in seconds) an incoming call has to wait before it is answered
automatically by the system. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
Off: Active control is disabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Conference AutoAnswer Mode
Default value: 0
Define the auto answer mode. Use the Conference AutoAnswer Delay setting if you want
the system to wait a number of seconds before answering the call, and use the Conference
AutoAnswer Mute setting if you want your microphone to be muted when the call is
answered.
Value space: Integer (0..50)
The auto answer delay (seconds).
Conference CallProtocolIPStack
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Select if the system should enable IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack on the call protocol (SIP,
H323).
Value space: Off/On
Off: You can answer incoming calls manually by tapping Answer on the Touch controller.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The system automatically answers incoming calls, except if you are already in a call.
You can answer or decline incoming calls manually when you are already engaged in a
call.
Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
Default value: Dual
Dual: Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 for the call protocol.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the call protocol will use IPv4.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the call protocol will use IPv6.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
137
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference DefaultCall Protocol
Conference Encryption Mode
Define the Default Call Protocol to be used when placing calls from the system.
Define the conference encryption mode. A padlock with the text "Encryption On" or
"Encryption Off" displays on screen for a few seconds when the conference starts.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
NOTE: If the Encryption Option Key is not installed on the video system, the encryption
mode is always Off.
Value space: Auto/H320/H323/Sip/Spark
Requires user role: ADMIN
Auto: Enables auto-selection of the call protocol based on which protocols are available.
If multiple protocols are available, the order of priority is: 1) SIP; 2) H323; 3) H320. If the
system cannot register, the auto-selection chooses H323.
Default value: BestEffort
Value space: Off/On/BestEffort
H320: All calls are set up as H.320 calls (only applicable if used with Cisco TelePresence
ISDN Link).
Off: The system will not use encryption.
H323: All calls are set up as H.323 calls.
BestEffort: The system will use encryption whenever possible.
On: The system will only allow calls that are encrypted.
Sip: All calls are set up as SIP calls.
> In Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES-128), the call will
be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
Spark: Reserved for Webex registered systems. Do not use.
> In MultiSite calls: In order to have encrypted MultiSite conferences, all sites must
support encryption. If not, the conference will be unencrypted.
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Define the Default Call Rate to be used when placing calls from the system.
Conference FarEndControl Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 6000
Lets you decide if the remote side (far end) should be allowed to select your video sources
and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
Requires user role: ADMIN
The default call rate (kbps).
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
Off: The far end is not allowed to select your video sources or to control your local
camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
This setting determines the default duration of a Do Not Disturb session, i.e. the period
when incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The session can be
terminated earlier by using the user interface.
On: Allows the far end to be able to select your video sources and control your local
camera (pan, tilt, zoom). You will still be able to control your camera and select your
video sources as normal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 60
Value space: Integer (1..1440)
The number of minutes (maximum 1440 minutes = 24 hours) before the Do Not Disturb
session times out automatically.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
138
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability
Conference MaxTransmitCallRate
Define the far end control (H.224) signal capability mode.
Default value: On
Define the maximum transmit bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference
MaxTotalTransmitCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
calls.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Off: Disable the far end control signal capability.
Default value: 6000
On: Enable the far end control signal capability.
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum transmitt call rate (kbps).
Conference FarEndMessage Mode
Toggle whether it is allowed to send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for
use with control systems or macros. Works with SIP calls only. This setting will enable/
disable the use of the xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send command.
Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum overall receive bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly among
all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or downspeeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a
call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.
This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to
host a multipoint video conference.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
The maximum receive bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxReceiveCallRate setting.
Off: It is not possible to send messages between two codecs.
On: It is possible to send messages between two codecs in a point-to-point call.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate
Default value: 6000
Define the maximum receive bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference
MaxTotalReceiveCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
calls.
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 6000
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
139
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate
Conference Multipoint Mode
This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to
host a multipoint video conference.
Define how the video system handles multiparty video conferences (ad hoc conferences).
If registered to a Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS), the video system
can use its own built-in MultiSite feature. If registered to a Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (CUCM) version 8.6.2 or newer, the video system can use either the CUCM
conference bridge, or the video system's own built-in MultiSite feature. Which option to use,
is set-up by CUCM.
Define the maximum overall transmit bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly
among all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or
down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or
when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.
The maximum transmit bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxTransmitCallRate setting.
The CUCM conference bridge allows you to set up conferences with many participants. The
built-in MultiSite allows up to five participants (yourself included) plus one additional audio
call.
Requires user role: ADMIN
The built-in MultiSite is optional and may not be available on all video systems.
Default value: 6000
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
Default value: Auto
The maximum transmit call rate (kbps).
Value space: Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode
Auto: The multipoint method is selected automatically; if no multipoint method is
available, the Multipoint Mode will be set to Off.
Define if the microphones shall be unmuted automatically when all calls are disconnected.
In a meeting room or other shared resources this may be done to prepare the system for
the next user.
CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by the CUCM
configured conference bridge. This setting is provisioned by CUCM in a CUCM
environment, and should never be set manually by the user.
MultiSite: Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature. If
MultiSite is selected when the MultiSite feature is not available, the Multipoint Mode will
automatically be set to Off.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Off: Multiparty conferences are not allowed.
Value space: Off/On
Off: If muted during a call, let the microphones remain muted after the call is
disconnected.
Conference MultiStream Mode
On: Unmute the microphones after the call is disconnected.
The video system supports multistream video for conferences.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Multistream will be used when the conference infrastructure supports the feature.
Minimum versions required: CMS 2.2, CUCM 11.5, VCS X8.7.
Off: Multistream is disabled.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
140
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode
Conference Presentation RelayQuality
Select whether or not to allow incoming calls when already in a call/conference.
This configuration applies to video systems that are using the built-in MultiSite feature
(optional) to host a multipoint video conference. When a remote user shares a presentation,
the video system will transcode the presentation and send it to the other participants in the
multipoint conference. The RelayQuality setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution for the presentation source.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Allow
Value space: Allow/Deny
Requires user role: ADMIN
Allow: You will be notified when someone calls you while you are already in a call.
You can accept the incoming call or not. The ongoing call may be put on hold while
answering the incoming call; or you may merge the calls (requires support for multiparty
video conferences).
Default value: Sharpness
Value space: Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
Deny: An incoming call will be rejected if you are already in a call. You will not be notified
about the incoming call. However, the call will appear as a missed call in the call history
list.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.
Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold
Conference VideoBandwidth Mode
Define whether or not to continue sharing a presentation after the remote site has put you
on hold.
Define the conference video bandwidth mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: NoAction
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: NoAction/Stop
Value space: Dynamic/Static
NoAction: The video system will not stop the presentation sharing when put on hold. The
presentation will not be shared while you are on hold, but it will continue automatically
when the call is resumed.
Dynamic: The available transmit bandwidth for the video channels are distributed among
the currently active channels. If there is no presentation, the main video channels will
use the bandwidth of the presentation channel.
Stop: The video system stops the presentation sharing when the remote site puts you on
hold. The presentation will not continue when the call is resumed.
Static: The available transmit bandwidth is assigned to each video channel, even if it is
not active.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
141
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
FacilityService settings
FacilityService Service [1..5] Type
FacilityService Service [1..5] Number
Up to five different facility services can be supported simultaneously. With this setting you
can select what kind of services they are. A facility service is not available unless both the
FacilityService Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are
properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface.
Define the number (URI or phone number) of the facility service. Up to five different facility
services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService
Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set.
Facility services are available from the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Helpdesk
Default value: ""
Value space: Catering/Concierge/Emergency/Helpdesk/Security/Transportation/Other
Value space: String (0, 1024)
Catering: Select this option for catering services.
The number (URI or phone number) of the facility service.
Concierge: Select this option for concierge services.
Emergency: Select this option for emergency services.
FacilityService Service [1..5] CallType
Helpdesk: Select this option for helpdesk services.
Define the call type for each facility service. Up to five different facility services are
supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n]
Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services
are available from the user interface.
Security: Select this option for security services.
Transportation: Select this option for transportation services.
Other: Select this option for services not covered by the other options.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
FacilityService Service [1..5] Name
Default value: Video
Define the name of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported.
A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the
FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. The name will show on the
facility service call button, which appears when you tap the question mark icon in the top
bar. Facility services are available from the user interface.
Value space: Audio/Video
Audio: Select this option for audio calls.
Video: Select this option for video calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Service 1: "Live Support" Other services: ""
Value space: String (0, 1024)
The name of the facility service.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
142
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
GPIO settings
GPIO Pin [1..4] Mode
The four GPIO pins are configured individually. The state can be retrieved by xStatus GPIO
Pin [1..4] State. The default pin state is High (+12 V). When activated as an output, a pin is
set to 0 V (Low); when deactivated, it is set to +12 V (High). To activate a pin as an input, the
voltage on the pin must be pulled down to 0 V; to deactivate it, raise the voltage to +12 V.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: InputNoAction
Value space: InputAcceptAllCalls/InputDisconnectAllCalls/InputMuteMicrophones/
InputNoAction/OutputAllCallsEncrypted/OutputInCall/OutputManualState/
OutputMicrophonesMuted/OutputPresentationOn/OutputStandbyActive
InputAcceptAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Accept command,
which accepts all incoming calls, will be issued.
InputDisconnectAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Disconnect
command, which disconnects all calls, will be issued.
InputMuteMicrophones: When the pin is activated, the microphones will be muted. When
deactivated, the microphones will be unmuted.
InputNoAction: The pin state can be set, but no operation is performed.
OutputAllCallsEncrypted: The pin is activated when all calls are encrypted, and
deactivated when one or more calls are not encrypted.
OutputInCall: The pin is activated when in call, and deactivated when not in call.
OutputManualState: The pin state can be set by xCommand GPIO ManualState Set PinX:
High/Low. It is set to +12 V or 0 V, respectively.
OutputMicrophonesMuted: The pin is activated when microphones are muted, and
deactivated when not muted.
OutputPresentationOn: The pin is activated when presentation is active, and deactivated
when presentation is not active.
OutputStandbyActive: The pin is activated when the system is in standby mode, and
deactivated when no longer in standby.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
143
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
H323 settings
H323 Authentication Mode
H323 Authentication Password
Define the authenticatin mode for the H.323 profile.
The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to
the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Off: The system will not try to authenticate itself to a H.323 Gatekeeper, but will still try a
normal registration.
Default value: ""
On: If an H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that it requires authentication, the system will try
to authenticate itself to the gatekeeper. Requires the H323 Authentication LoginName
and H323 Authentication Password settings to be defined on both the codec and the
Gatekeeper.
Value space: String (0, 50)
The authentication password.
H323 CallSetup Mode
H323 Authentication LoginName
Defines whether to use a Gatekeeper or Direct calling when establishing H.323 calls.
Direct H.323 calls can be made also when H323 CallSetup Mode is set to Gatekeeper.
The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to
the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Gatekeeper
Value space: Direct/Gatekeeper
Requires user role: ADMIN
Direct: You can only make an H.323 call by dialing an IP address directly.
Default value: ""
Gatekeeper: The system uses a Gatekeeper to make an H.323 call. When choosing this
option, the H323 Gatekeeper Address must also be configured.
Value space: String (0, 50)
The authentication login name.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
144
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
H323 Encryption KeySize
H323 H323Alias ID
Define the minimum or maximum key size for the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method,
which is used when establishing the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption key.
Define the H.323 Alias ID, which is used to address the system on a H.323 Gatekeeper and
will be displayed in the call lists.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Min1024bit
Default value: ""
Value space: Max1024bit/Min1024bit/Min2048bit
Value space: String (0, 49)
Max1024bit: The maximum size is 1024 bit.
The H.323 Alias ID. Example: "[email protected]", "My H.323 Alias ID"
Min1024bit: The minimum size is 1024 bit.
Min2048bit: The minimum size is 2048 bit.
H323 NAT Mode
The firewall traversal technology creates a secure path through the firewall barrier, and
enables proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video
conferencing system (when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). NOTE: NAT does not
work in conjunction with gatekeepers.
H323 Gatekeeper Address
Define the IP address of the Gatekeeper. Requires H323 CallSetup Mode to be set to
Gatekeeper.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Value space: String (0, 255)
Auto: The system will determine if the H323 NAT Address or the real IP address should
be used in signaling. This makes it possible to place calls to endpoints on the LAN as
well as endpoints on the WAN. If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, the real IP
address will be used.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
H323 H323Alias E164
Off: The system will signal the real IP address.
The H.323 Alias E.164 defines the address of the system, according to the numbering plan
implemented in the H.323 Gatekeeper. The E.164 alias is equivalent to a telephone number,
sometimes combined with access codes.
On: The system will signal the configured H323 NAT Address instead of its real IP
address in Q.931 and H.245. The NAT server address will be shown in the startup-menu
as: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1". If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, H.323 calls
cannot be set up.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 30)
The H.323 Alias E.164 address. Valid characters are 0-9, * and #.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
145
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
H323 NAT Address
Define the external/global IP address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. Note that NAT cannot be used when registered to
a gatekeeper.
In the router, the following ports must be routed to the system's IP address:
* Port 1720
* Port 5555-6555
* Port 2326-2487
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
H323 PortAllocation
This setting affects the H.245 port numbers used for H.323 call signaling.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: Dynamic/Static
Dynamic: The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls, as some
firewalls consider this as a sign of attack. When Dynamic is selected, the H.323 ports
used are from 11000 to 20999. Once 20999 is reached they restart again at 11000.
The ports are automatically selected by the system within the given range. Firewall
administrators should not try to deduce which ports are used when, as the allocation
schema within the mentioned range may change without any further notice.
Static: When set to Static the ports are given within a static predefined range [55556555].
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
146
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Logging settings
Logging External Mode
Logging External Server Port
Determine whether or not to use a remote syslog server for logging.
The port that the remote syslog server listens for messages on. If set to 0, the video system
will use the standard syslog port. The standard syslog port is 514 for syslog, and 6514 for
syslog over TLS.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On
Default value: 514
Off: Disable logging to a remote syslog server.
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
On: Enable logging to a remote syslog server.
The number of the port that the remote syslog server is using. 0 means that the video
system uses the standard syslog port.
Logging External Protocol
Logging Mode
Determine which protocol to use toward the remote logging server. You can use either the
syslog protocol over TLS (Transport Layer Security), or the syslog protocol in plaintext. For
details about the syslog protocol, see RFC 5424.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the logging mode for the video system (syslog service). When disabled, the syslog
service does not start, and most of the event logs are not generated. The Historical Logs
and Call Logs are not affected.
Default value: SyslogTLS
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Syslog/SyslogTLS
Default value: On
Syslog: Syslog protocol in plain text.
Value space: Off/On
SyslogTLS: Syslog protocol over TLS.
Off: Disable the system logging service.
On: Enable the system logging service.
Logging External Server Address
The address of the remote syslog server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
147
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Macros settings
Macros Mode
Macros allow you to write snippets of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video
endpoint, thus creating custom behavior. Use of macros is disabled by default, but the first
time you open the Macro Editor you will be asked whether to enable use of macros on the
codec. Use this setting when you want to manually enable, or to permanently disable the
use of macros on the codec. You can disable the use of macros within the Macro Editor.
But this will not permanently disable macros from running, because every time the codec is
reset the macros will be re-enabled automatically.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Permanently disable the use of macros on this video system.
On: Enable the use of macros on this video system.
Macros AutoStart
All the macros run in a single process on the video endpoint, called the macro runtime. It
should be running by default, but you can choose to stop and start it manually. If you restart
the video system, the runtime will automatically start again if auto start is enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The macro runtime will not start automatically after a restart of the video system.
On: The macro runtime will start automatically after a restart of the video system.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
148
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network settings
Network [1..1] DNS DNSSEC Mode
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Mode
Domain Name System Security extensions (DNSSEC) is a set of extensions to DNS. It is
used to authenticate DNS replies for zones that are signed. It will still allow unsigned zones.
The system can be connected to an IEEE 802.1X LAN network, with a port-based network
access control that is used to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
Off: The 802.1X authentication is disabled.
On: Enable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
On: The 802.1X authentication is enabled.
Network [1..1] DNS Domain Name
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X TlsVerify
The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified
names.
Verification of the server-side certificate of an IEEE802.1x connection against the
certificates in the local CA-list when TLS is used. The CA-list must be uploaded to the
video system. This can be done from the web interface.
Example: If the DNS Domain Name is "company.com" and the name to lookup is
"MyVideoSystem", this will result in the DNS lookup "MyVideoSystem.company.com".
This setting takes effect only when Network [1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls is enabled (On).
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: Off
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Off/On
The DNS domain name.
Off: When set to Off, TLS connections are allowed without verifying the server-side
X.509 certificate against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no CA-list
has been uploaded to the codec.
Network [1..1] DNS Server [1..3] Address
On: When set to On, the server-side X.509 certificate will be validated against the local
CA-list for all TLS connections. Only servers with a valid certificate will be allowed.
Define the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to three addresses may be specified.
If the network addresses are unknown, contact your administrator or Internet Service
Provider.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
149
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity
Authentication using a private key/certificate pair during an IEEE802.1x connection. The
authentication X.509 certificate must be uploaded to the video system. This can be done
from the web interface.
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) types that support different tunneled identity, like EAP-PEAP and
EAP-TTLS. If set, the anonymous ID will be used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity
Request.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 64)
Off: When set to Off client-side authentication is not used (only server-side).
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string.
On: When set to On the client (video system) will perform a mutual authentication TLS
handshake with the server.
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Md5
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Identity
Define the user name for 802.1X authentication.
Define the Md5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) mode. This is a Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol that relies on a shared secret. Md5 is a Weak security.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: On
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Off/On
Off: The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled.
The user name for 802.1X authentication.
On: The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled.
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Password
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls
Define the password for 802.1X authentication.
Default value: ""
Define the TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) mode. Authenticates LAN clients
without the need for client certificates. Developed by Funk Software and Certicom. Usually
supported by Agere Systems, Proxim and Avaya.
Value space: String (0, 50)
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
The password for 802.1X authentication.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The EAP-TTLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TTLS protocol is enabled.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
150
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls
Network [1..1] IPv4 Assignment
Enable or disable the use of EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) for IEEE802.1x
connections. The EAP-TLS protocol, defined in RFC 5216, is considered one of the most
secure EAP standards. LAN clients are authenticated using client certificates.
Define how the system will obtain its IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
When using DHCP for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used as
client identifier in DHCP requests.
Default value: On
Default value: DHCP
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Static/DHCP
Off: The EAP-TLS protocol is disabled.
Static: The addresses must be configured manually using the Network IPv4 Address,
Network IPv4 Gateway and Network IPv4 SubnetMask settings (static addresses).
On: The EAP-TLS protocol is enabled.
DHCP: The system addresses are automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
Network [1..1] IEEE8021X Eap Peap
Network [1..1] IPv4 Address
Define the Peap (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) mode. Authenticates LAN
clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Microsoft, Cisco and RSA
Security.
Define the static IPv4 network address for the system. Applicable only when Network IPv4
Assignment is set to Static.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 64)
Off: The EAP-PEAP protocol is disabled.
A valid IPv4 address.
On: The EAP-PEAP protocol is enabled.
Network [1..1] IPv4 Gateway
Network [1..1] IPStack
Define the IPv4 network gateway address. Applicable only when the Network IPv4
Assignment is set to Static.
Select if the system should use IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack, on the network interface. NOTE:
After changing this setting you may have to wait up to 30 seconds before it takes effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: Dual
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
A valid IPv4 address.
Dual: When set to Dual, the network interface can operate on both IP versions at the
same time, and can have both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address at the same time.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the system will use IPv4 on the network interface.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the system will use IPv6 on the network interface.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
151
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] IPv4 SubnetMask
Network [1..1] IPv6 Address
Define the IPv4 network subnet mask. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment
is set to Static.
Define the static IPv6 network address for the system. Applicable only when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
A valid IPv6 address including a network mask. Example: 2001:DB8::/48
Network [1..1] IPv6 Assignment
Network [1..1] IPv6 Gateway
Define how the system will obtain its IPv6 address and the default gateway address.
Define the IPv6 network gateway address. This setting is only applicable when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.
When using DHCPv6 for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used
as client identifier in DHCP requests.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: Autoconf
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Static/DHCPv6/Autoconf
A valid IPv6 address.
Static: The codec and gateway IP addresses must be configured manually using the
Network IPv6 Address and Network IPv6 Gateway settings. The options, for example
NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6
server. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Network [1..1] IPv6 DHCPOptions
Retrieve a set of DHCP options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, from a
DHCPv6 server.
DHCPv6: All IPv6 addresses, including options, will be obtained from a DHCPv6 server.
See RFC 3315 for a detailed description. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting will be
ignored.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Autoconf: Enable IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration of the IPv6 network interface. See
RFC 4862 for a detailed description. The options, for example NTP and DNS server
addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network
IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the retrieval of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
On: Enable the retrieval of a selected set of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
152
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Network [1..1] MTU
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Audio
Define the Ethernet MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size. The MTU size must be
supported by your network infrastructure. The minimum size is 576 for IPv4 and 1280 for
IPv6.
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Appendices
Define which priority Audio packets should have in the IP network.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended class for Audio is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in
doubt, contact your network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 1500
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Value space: Integer (576..1500)
Set a value for the MTU (bytes).
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Network [1..1] QoS Mode
Value space: Integer (0..63)
The QoS (Quality of Service) is a method which handles the priority of audio, video and
data in the network. The QoS settings must be supported by the infrastructure. Diffserv
(Differentiated Services) is a computer networking architecture that specifies a simple,
scalable and coarse-grained mechanism for classifying, managing network traffic and
providing QoS priorities on modern IP networks.
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Video
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Default value: Diffserv
Define which priority Video packets should have in the IP network. The packets on the
presentation channel (shared content) are also in the Video packet category. The priority
for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The
recommended class for Video is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
Set the priority of the audio packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Value space: Off/Diffserv
Off: No QoS method is used.
Diffserv: When you set the QoS Mode to Diffserv, the Network QoS Diffserv Audio,
Network QoS Diffserv Video, Network QoS Diffserv Data, Network QoS Diffserv
Signalling, Network QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 and Network QoS Diffserv NTP settings are
used to prioritize packets.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the video packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
153
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Data
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Data packets should have in the IP network.
Define which priority ICMPv6 packets should have in the IP network.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for Data is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, contact
your network administrator.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for ICMPv6 is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the data packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Set the priority of the ICMPv6 packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv Signalling
Network [1..1] QoS Diffserv NTP
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Signalling packets that are deemed critical (time-sensitive) for the
real-time operation should have in the IP network.
Define which priority NTP packets should have in the IP network.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for NTP is 0, which means "best effort". If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended class for Signalling is CS3, which equals the decimal value 24. If
in doubt, contact your network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the NTP packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Set the priority of the signalling packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
154
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [1..1] RemoteAccess Allow
Network [1..1] TrafficControl Mode
Define which IP addresses (IPv4/IPv6) are allowed for remote access to the codec from
SSH/Telnet/HTTP/HTTPS. Multiple IP addresses are separated by a white space.
Define the network traffic control mode to decide how to control the video packets
transmission speed.
A network mask (IP range) is specified by <ip address>/N, where N is 1-32 for IPv4, and N
is 1-128 for IPv6. The /N is a common indication of a network mask where the first N bits
are set. Thus 192.168.0.0/24 would match any address starting with 192.168.0, since these
are the first 24 bits in the address.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Off: Transmit video packets at link speed.
Default value: ""
On: Transmit video packets at maximum 20 Mbps. Can be used to smooth out bursts in
the outgoing network traffic.
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Network [1..1] VLAN Voice Mode
Network [1..1] Speed
Define the VLAN voice mode. The VLAN Voice Mode will be set to Auto automatically if you
have Cisco UCM (Cisco Unified Communications Manager) as provisioning infrastructure.
Note that Auto mode will NOT work if the NetworkServices CDP Mode setting is Off.
Define the Ethernet link speed. We recommend not to change from the default value,
which negotiates with the network to set the speed automatically. If you do not use autonegotiation, make sure that the speed you choose is supported by the closest switch in
your network infrastructure.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
Default value: Auto
Auto: The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), if available, assigns an id to the voice VLAN. If
CDP is not available, VLAN is not enabled.
Value space: Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full
Manual: The VLAN ID is set manually using the Network VLAN Voice VlanId setting. If
CDP is available, the manually set value will be overruled by the value assigned by CDP.
Auto: Auto-negotiate link speed.
10half: Force link to 10 Mbps half-duplex.
Off: VLAN is not enabled.
10full: Force link to 10 Mbps full-duplex.
100half: Force link to 100 Mbps half-duplex.
Network [1..1] VLAN Voice VlanId
100full: Force link to 100 Mbps full-duplex.
Define the VLAN voice ID. This setting will only take effect if Network VLAN Voice Mode is
set to Manual.
1000full: Force link to 1 Gbps full-duplex.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 1
Value space: Integer (1..4094)
Set the VLAN voice ID.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
155
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices settings
NetworkServices CDP Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Mode
Enable or disable the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) daemon. Enabling CDP will make the
endpoint report certain statistics and device identifiers to a CDP-enabled switch. If CDP is
disabled, the Network VLAN Voice Mode: Auto setting will not work.
Define whether or not to allow access to the video system using the HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP
Secure) protocols. Note that the video system's web interface use HTTP or HTTPS. If this
setting is switched Off, you cannot use the web interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN
For additional security (encryption and decryption of requests and pages that are returned
by the web server), allow only HTTPS.
Default value: On
Note: The default value is HTTP+HTTPS for video systems that have been upgraded to
CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the video system has not
been factory reset after the upgrade.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The CDP daemon is disabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The CDP daemon is enabled.
Default value: HTTPS (changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS in CE9.4)
NetworkServices H323 Mode
Value space: Off/HTTP+HTTPS/HTTPS
Off: Access to the video system not allowed via HTTP or HTTPS.
Define whether the system should be able to place and receive H.323 calls or not.
HTTP+HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via both HTTP and HTTPS.
Requires user role: ADMIN
HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via HTTPS, but not via HTTP.
Default value: Off
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
This is the user name part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 80)
The authentication login name.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
156
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl
This is the password part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
Set the URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script. Requires that the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to PACUrl.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: String (0..255)
The authentication password.
The URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script.
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode
The HTTP proxy for Cisco Webex can be set up manually, it can be auto-configured
(PACUrl), fully automated (WPAD), or it can be turned off.
Define the support for OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) responder services. The
OCSP feature allows users to enable OCSP instead of certificate revocation lists (CRLs) to
check the certificate status.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
For any outgoing HTTPS connection, the OCSP responder is queried of the status. If the
corresponding certificate has been revoked, then the HTTPS connection will not be used.
Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
Requires user role: ADMIN
Manual: Enter the address of the proxy server in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
URL setting. Optionally, also add the HTTP proxy login name and password in the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName/Password settings.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The HTTP proxy mode is turned off.
Off: Disable OCSP support.
PACUrl: The HTTP proxy is auto-configured. You must enter the URL for the PAC (Proxy
Auto Configuration) script in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl setting.
On: Enable OCSP support.
WPAD: With WPAD (Web Proxy Auto Discovery) the HTTP proxy is fully automated and
auto-configured.
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL
Define the URL of the OCSP responder (server) that will be used to check the certificate
status.
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
Set the URL of the HTTP proxy server. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
Mode is set to Manual.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: ""
A valid URL.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
The URL of the HTTP proxy server.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
157
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
When the video system connects to a HTTPS client (like a web browser), the client can be
asked to present a certificate to the video system to identify itself.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.1
Default value: Off
Value space: TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: Off/On
TLSv1.1: Support of TLS version 1.1 or higher.
Off: Do not verify client certificates.
TLSv1.2: Support of TLS version 1.2 or higher.
On: Requires the client to present a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate
Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the system in
advance.
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
The HTTP Strict Transport Security header lets a web site inform the browser that it should
never load the site using HTTP and should automatically convert all attempts to access the
site using HTTP to HTTPS requests instead.
NetworkServices NTP Mode
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the system's time and date to a
reference time server. The time server will be queried regularly for time updates.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On
Default value: Auto
Off: The HTTP strict transport security feature is disabled.
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
On: The HTTP strict transport security feature is enabled.
Auto: The system will use an NTP server for time reference. As default, the server
address will be obtained from the network's DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not used,
or if the DHCP server does not provide an NTP server address, the NTP server address
that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be used.
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate
When the video system connects to an external HTTPS server (like a phone book server
or an external manager), this server will present a certificate to the video system to identify
itself.
Manual: The system will use the NTP server that is specified in the NetworkServices
NTP Server [n] Address setting for time reference.
Off: The system will not use an NTP server. The NetworkServices NTP Server [n]
Address setting will be ignored.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Do not verify server certificates.
On: Requires the system to verify that the server certificate is signed by a trusted
Certificate Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the
system in advance.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
158
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Address
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address
The address of the NTP server that will be used when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to
Manual, and when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to Auto and no address is supplied by
a DHCP server.
Define the address of up to three SNMP Managers.
Appendices
The system's SNMP Agent (in the codec) responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
program etc.), for example about system location and system contact. SNMP traps are not
supported.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: "0.tandberg.pool.ntp.org"
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
NetworkServices SIP Mode
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
Define whether the system should be able to place and receive SIP calls or not.
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP Community. SNMP Community names
are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a password (case
sensitive) in order to receive a response from the SNMP Agent in the codec. The default
password is "public". If you have the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) you
must make sure the same SNMP Community is configured there too. NOTE: The SNMP
Community password is case sensitive.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
Value space: String (0, 50)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used in network management systems
to monitor network-attached devices (routers, servers, switches, projectors, etc) for
conditions that warrant administrative attention. SNMP exposes management data in the
form of variables on the managed systems, which describe the system configuration. These
variables can then be queried (set to ReadOnly) and sometimes set (set to ReadWrite) by
managing applications.
The SNMP community name.
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Contact.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ReadOnly
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/ReadOnly/ReadWrite
Value space: String (0, 50)
Off: Disable the SNMP network service.
The name of the SNMP system contact.
ReadOnly: Enable the SNMP network service for queries only.
ReadWrite: Enable the SNMP network service for both queries and commands.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
159
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Location.
Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication can be used to access the codec.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: On
Value space: String (0, 50)
Value space: Off/On
The name of the SNMP system location.
Off: The SSH public key is not allowed.
On: The SSH public key is allowed.
NetworkServices SSH Mode
NetworkServices Telnet Mode
SSH (or Secure Shell) protocol can provide secure encrypted communication between the
codec and your local computer.
Telnet is a network protocol used on the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN) connections.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The SSH protocol is disabled.
Off: The Telnet protocol is disabled. This is the factory setting.
On: The SSH protocol is enabled.
On: The Telnet protocol is enabled.
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm
Choose the cryptographic algorithm that shall be used for the SSH host key. Choices
are RSA (Rivest–Shamir–Adleman) with 2048 bits keysize, ECDSA (Elliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm) with NIST curve P-384, and EdDSA (Edwards-curve Digital Signature
Algorithm) with ed25519 signature schema.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: RSA
Value space: ECDSA/RSA/ed25519
ECDSA: Use the ECDSA algorithm (nist-384p).
RSA: Use the RSA algorithm (2048 bits).
ed25519: Use the ed25519 algorithm.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
160
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices UPnP Mode
NetworkServices WelcomeText
Fully disable UPnP (Universal Plug and Play), or enable UPnP for a short time period after
the video system has been switched on or restarted.
Choose which information the user should see when logging on to the codec through
Telnet/SSH.
The default operation is that UPnP is enabled when you switch on or restart the video
system. Then UPnP is automatically disabled after the timeout period that is defined in the
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout setting. Use the video system’s web interface to set the
timeout.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
When UPnP is enabled, the video system advertises its presence on the network. The
advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover video systems automatically, and
you do not need to manually enter the video system's IP address in order to pair the Touch
controller.
Off: The welcome text is: Login successful
On: The welcome text is: Welcome to <system name>; Software version; Software
release date; Login successful.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode
Value space: Off/On
Enable or disable the video system's XML API. For security reasons this may be disabled.
Disabling the XML API will limit the remote manageability with for example TMS, which no
longer will be able to connect to the video system.
Off: UPnP is disabled. The video system does not advertise its presence, and you have
to enter the video system's IP address manually in order to pair a Touch controller to the
video system.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: UPnP is enabled. The video system advertises its presence until the timeout period
expires.
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The XML API is disabled.
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout
On: The XML API is enabled.
Define for how many seconds UPnP shall stay enabled after the video system is switched
on or restarted. The NetworkServices UPnP Mode setting must be On for this setting to
take any effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 600
Value space: Integer (0..3600)
Range: Select a value between 0 and 3600 seconds.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
161
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Peripherals settings
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience
Peripherals Profile Cameras
If the Touch controller is used in environments with considerable amounts of
electromagnetic noise present, you may experience an appearance of false signals—for
example as if someone tapped the Touch controller when obviously nobody did so. To cope
with this you may enable the EMC Resilience Mode.
Define the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video system.
This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the number of
connected cameras does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an
inconsistency.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Default value: Minimum1
Value space: Off/On
Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Off: The EMC resilience is disabled.
NotSet: No camera check is performed.
On: The EMC resilience is enabled.
Minimum1: At least one camera should be connected to the video system.
0-7: Select the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video
system.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing
In order to use Cisco Touch 10 (touch panel) as user interface for the video system, Touch
10 must be either directly connected to the video system or paired to the video system via
LAN. The latter is referred to as remote pairing.
Peripherals Profile ControlSystems
Define if a third-party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, is expected to be
connected to the video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics
service. If the number of connected control systems does not match this setting, the
diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency. Note that only one third-party control
system is supported.
Remote pairing is allowed by default; you must switch this setting Off if you want to prevent
remote pairing.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
If set to 1, the control system must send heart beats to the video system using xCommand
Peripherals Pair and HeartBeat commands. Failing to do so will cause the in-room control
extensions to show a warning that the video system has lost connectivity to the control
system.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is not allowed.
On: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is allowed.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: NotSet
Value space: 1/NotSet
1: One third-party control system should be connected to the video system.
NotSet: No check for a third-party control system is performed.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
162
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels
Define the number of Cisco Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the
number of connected Touch controllers does not match this setting, the diagnostics service
will report it as an inconsistency.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Minimum1
Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5
NotSet: No touch panel check is performed.
Minimum1: At least one Cisco Touch controller should be connected to the video system.
0-5: Select the number of Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. Note that only one Cisco Touch controller is officially supported.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
163
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Phonebook settings
Phonebook Server [1..1] ID
Define a name for the external phone book.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
The name for the external phone book.
Phonebook Server [1..1] Type
Select the phonebook server type.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/CUCM/Spark/TMS/VCS
Off: Do not use a phonebook.
CUCM: The phonebook is located on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Spark: The phonebook is located in the Cisco Webex cloud service.
TMS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite server.
VCS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication
Server.
Phonebook Server [1..1] URL
Define the address (URL) to the external phone book server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid address (URL) to the phone book server.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
164
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Provisioning settings
Provisioning Connectivity
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress
This setting controls how the device discovers whether it should request an internal or
external configuration from the provisioning server.
Default value: Auto
Only applicable when the endpoint is provisioned by Cisco Unified Communication Manager
(CUCM) and an alternate CUCM is available for redundancy. Define the address of the
alternate CUCM. If the main CUCM is not available, the endpoint will be provisioned by the
alternate CUCM. When the main CUCM is available again, the endpoint will be provisioned
by this CUCM.
Value space: Internal/External/Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Internal: Request internal configuration.
Default value: ""
External: Request external configuration.
Value space: String (0, 64)
Auto: Automatically discover using NAPTR queries whether internal or external
configurations should be requested. If the NAPTR responses have the "e" flag, external
configurations will be requested. Otherwise internal configurations will be requested.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol
Provisioning ExternalManager Address
Define whether to use the HTTP (unsecure communication) or HTTPS (secure
communication) protocol when sending requests to the external manager / provisioning
system.
Define the IP Address or DNS name of the external manager / provisioning system.
If an External Manager Address (and Path) is configured, the system will send a message
to this address when starting up. When receiving this message the external manager /
provisioning system can return configurations/commands to the unit as a result.
The selected protocol must be enabled in the NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
When using CUCM or TMS provisioning, the DHCP server can be set up to provide the
external manager address automatically (DHCP Option 242 for TMS, and DHCP Option
150 for CUCM). An address set in the Provisioning ExternalManager Address setting will
override the address provided by DHCP.
Default value: HTTP
Value space: HTTPS/HTTP
HTTPS: Send requests via HTTPS.
HTTP: Send requests via HTTP.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
165
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Provisioning ExternalManager Path
Provisioning Mode
Define the Path to the external manager / provisioning system. This setting is required
when several management services reside on the same server, i.e. share the same External
Manager address.
It is possible to configure a video system using a provisioning system (external manager).
This allows video conferencing network administrators to manage many video systems
simultaneously. With this setting you choose which type of provisioning system to
use. Provisioning can also be switched off. Contact your provisioning system provider/
representative for more information.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: Auto
A valid path to the external manager or provisioning system.
Value space: Off/Auto/CUCM/Edge/Spark/TMS/VCS
Off: The video system is not configured by a provisioning system.
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain
Auto: The provisioning server is automatically selected as set up in the DHCP server.
Define the SIP domain for the VCS provisioning server.
CUCM: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager).
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Edge: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager). The system connects to CUCM via the Collaboration Edge
infrastructure. In order to register over Edge the encryption option key must be installed
on the video system.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
Spark: Push configurations to the video system from the Cisco Webex cloud service.
A valid domain name.
TMS: Push configurations to the video system from TMS (Cisco TelePresence
Management System).
VCS: Push configurations to the video system from VCS (Cisco TelePresence Video
Communication Server).
Provisioning LoginName
This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 80)
A valid username.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
166
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Provisioning Password
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid password.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
167
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Proximity settings
Proximity Mode
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients
Determine whether the video system will emit ultrasound pairing messages or not.
Enable or disable content sharing from Proximity clients. When this setting is enabled, you
can share content from a Proximity client wirelessly on the video system, e.g. share your
laptop screen. This service is supported by laptops (OS X and Windows). Proximity Mode
must be On for this setting to take any effect.
When the video system emits ultrasound, Proximity clients can detect that they are close
to the video system. In order to use a client, at least one of the Proximity services must be
enabled (refer to the Proximity Services settings). In general, Cisco recommends enabling
all the Proximity services.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Enabled
Default value: On
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Value space: Off/On
Enabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is enabled.
Off: The video system does not emit ultrasound, and Proximity services cannot be used.
Disabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is disabled.
On: The video system emits ultrasound, and Proximity clients can detect that they are
close to the video system. Enabled Proximity services can be used.
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients
Enable or disable content sharing to Proximity clients. When enabled, Proximity clients will
receive the presentation from the video system. You can zoom in on details, view previous
content and take snapshots. This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
Proximity Services CallControl
Enable or disable basic call control features on Proximity clients. When this setting is
enabled, you are able to control a call using a Proximity client (for example dial, mute,
adjust volume and hang up). This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Disabled
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Default value: Disabled
Enabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is enabled.
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Disabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is disabled.
Enabled: Call control from a Proximity client is enabled.
Disabled: Call control from a Proximity client is disabled.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
168
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
RoomAnalytics settings
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The video system counts people only when the system is in a call, or when self-view
is on.
On: The video system counts people as long as the video system is not in standby
mode. This includes outside of call, even if self-view is off.
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
The video system has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room,
and report the result in the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence status. This feature is based on
ultrasound. It takes a minimum of 2 minutes to detect whether people are present or not in
the room, and it may take up to 2 minutes for the status to change after the room becomes
vacant.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The video system's status does not show whether or not there are people present in
the room.
On: The video system's status shows whether or not there are people present in the
room.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
169
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
RoomReset settings
RoomReset Control
This setting is for use with control systems or macros. Macros allow you to write snippets
of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video endpoint, thus creating custom
behavior.
When a room has been idle for some time the system can send an event to indicate that the
room is ready to be reset.
The events that are sent when this setting is enabled are:
*e RoomReset SecondsToReset: 30
** end
*e RoomReset Reset
** end
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: CameraPositionsOnly/Off/On
CameraPositionsOnly: Not applicable.
Off: No RoomReset events will be sent.
On: The room reset control is enabled and RoomReset events will be sent.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
170
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
RTP settings
RTP Ports Range Start
RTP Video Ports Range Start
Define the first port in the range of RTP ports.
Define the first port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2486 for RTP and RTCP
media data. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, and 20
when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.
If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 2326
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (1024..65438)
Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65454)
Set the first port in the range of RTP ports.
Set the first port in the range of RTP video ports.
RTP Ports Range Stop
RTP Video Ports Range Stop
Define the last port in the range of RTP ports.
Define the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2487 for RTP and RTCP
media data. If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled the system is using the ports in the
range 1024 to 65436. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled,
and 20 when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.
If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 0
Default value: 2486
Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65535)
Value space: Integer (1120..65535)
Set the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
Set the last port in the range of RTP ports.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
171
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Security settings
Security Audit Logging Mode
Security Audit OnError Action
Define where to record or transmit the audit logs. The audit logs are sent to a syslog server.
Define what happens when the connection to the syslog server is lost. This setting is only
relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to ExternalSecure.
When using the External/ExternalSecure modes and setting the port assignment to manual
in the Security Audit Server PortAssignment setting, you must also enter the address and
port number for the audit server in the Security Audit Server Address and Security Audit
Server Port settings.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: Ignore
Value space: Halt/Ignore
Requires user role: AUDIT
Halt: If a halt condition is detected the system codec is rebooted and only the auditor is
allowed to operate the unit until the halt condition has passed. When the halt condition
has passed the audit logs are re-spooled to the syslog server. Halt conditions are: A
network breach (no physical link), no syslog server running (or incorrect address or port
to the syslog server), TLS authentication failed (if in use), local backup (re-spooling) log
full.
Default value: Internal
Value space: External/ExternalSecure/Internal/Off
External: The system sends the audit logs to an external syslog server. The syslog server
must support UDP.
ExternalSecure: The system sends encrypted audit logs to an external syslog server that
is verified by a certificate in the Audit CA list. The Audit CA list file must be uploaded to
the codec using the web interface. The common_name parameter of a certificate in the
CA list must match the IP address of the syslog server, and the secure TCP server must
be set up to listen for secure (TLS) TCP Syslog messages.
Ignore: The system will continue its normal operation, and rotate internal logs when full.
When the connection is restored it will again send its audit logs to the syslog server.
Security Audit Server Address
Internal: The system records the audit logs to internal logs, and rotates logs when they
are full.
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the IP address of the syslog server.
Only valid IPv4 or IPv6 address formats are accepted. Host names are not supported.
This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or
ExternalSecure.
Off: No audit logging is performed.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
172
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Security Audit Server Port
Security Session InactivityTimeout
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the port of the syslog server that the
system shall send its audit logs to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Server
PortAssignment is set to Manual.
Define how long the system will accept inactivity from the user before he is automatically
logged out from a web, Telnet, or SSH session.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Requires user role: ADMIN
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Default value: 514
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
Value space: Integer (0..10000)
Set the audit server port.
Set the inactivity timeout (minutes); or select 0 when inactivity should not enforce
automatic logout.
Security Audit Server PortAssignment
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. You can define how the port number of the
external syslog server will be assigned. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit
Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure. To see which port number is used you
can check the Security Audit Server Port status. Navigate to Setup > Status on the web
interface or; if on a command line interface, run the command xStatus Security Audit Server
Port.
Define the maximum number of failed login attempts per user for a web or SSH session. If
the user exceeded the maximum number of attempts the user will be locked out. 0 means
that there is no limit for failed logins.
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: Auto
Default value: 0
Value space: Auto/Manual
Value space: Integer (0..10)
Set the maximum number of failed login attempts per user.
Auto: Will use UDP port number 514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
External. Will use TCP port number 6514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
ExternalSecure.
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
Manual: Will use the port value defined in the Security Audit Server Port setting.
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user is 20 sessions.
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 20
Define how long the system will lock out a user after failed login to a web or SSH session.
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Value space: Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 60
Value space: Integer (0..10000)
Set the lockout time (minutes).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
173
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Security Session MaxTotalSessions
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total is 20 sessions.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 20
Value space: Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total.
Security Session ShowLastLogon
When logging in to the system using SSH or Telnet you will see the UserId, time and date of
the last session that did a successful login.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
On: Show information about the last session.
Off: Do not show information about the last session.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
174
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SerialPort settings
SerialPort Mode
Enable/disable the serial port.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the serial port.
On: Enable the serial port.
SerialPort BaudRate
Set the baud rate (data transmission rate, bits per second) for the serial port.
Other connection parameters for the serial port are: Data bits: 8; Parity: None; Stop bits: 1;
Flow control: None.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 115200
Value space: 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Choose a baud rate from the baud rates listed (bps).
SerialPort LoginRequired
Define if login shall be required when connecting to the serial port.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The user can access the codec via the serial port without any login.
On: Login is required when connecting to the codec via the serial port.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
175
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
SIP settings
SIP ANAT
SIP DefaultTransport
ANAT (Alternative Network Address Types) enables media negotiation for multiple
addresses and address types, as specified in RFC 4091.
Select the transport protocol to be used over the LAN.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Auto/TCP/Tls/UDP
Value space: Off/On
TCP: The system will always use TCP as the default transport method.
Off: Disable ANAT.
UDP: The system will always use UDP as the default transport method.
On: Enable ANAT.
Tls: The system will always use TLS as the default transport method. For TLS
connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. If no such CA-list is
available on the system then anonymous Diffie Hellman will be used.
SIP Authentication UserName
Auto: The system will try to connect using transport protocols in the following order: TLS,
TCP, UDP.
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
Requires user role: ADMIN
SIP DisplayName
Default value: ""
When configured the incoming call will report the display name instead of the SIP URI.
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid username.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
SIP Authentication Password
Value space: String (0, 550)
The name to be displayed instead of the SIP URI.
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid password.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
176
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate
SIP Line
The ICE protocol needs some time to reach a conclusion about which media route to use
(up to the first 5 seconds of a call). During this period media for the video system will be
sent to the Default Candidate as defined in this setting.
When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) the endpoint may be
part of a shared line. This means that several devices share the same directory number. The
different devices sharing the same number receive status from the other appearances on
the line as defined in RFC 4235.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Host
Note that shared lines are set up by CUCM, not by the endpoint. Therefore do not change
this setting manually; CUCM pushes this information to the endpoint when required.
Value space: Host/Rflx/Relay
Requires user role: ADMIN
Host: Send media to the video system's private IP address.
Default value: Private
Rflx: Send media to the video system's public IP address, as seen by the TURN server.
Value space: Private/Shared
Relay: Send media to the IP address and port allocated on the TURN server.
Shared: The system is part of a shared line and is therefore sharing its directory number
with other devices.
SIP Ice Mode
Private: This system is not part of a shared line.
ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment, RFC 5245) is a NAT traversal solution that the
video systems can use to discover the optimized media path. Thus the shortest route for
audio and video is always secured between the video systems.
SIP ListenPort
Turn on or off the listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports. If turned
off, the endpoint will only be reachable through the SIP registrar (CUCM or VCS).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Default value: On
Auto: ICE is enabled if a TURN server is provided, otherwise ICE is disabled.
Value space: Off/On
Off: ICE is disabled.
Off: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned off.
On: ICE is enabled.
On: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned on.
SIP Mailbox
When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) you may be offered
the option of having a private voice mailbox.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 255)
A valid number or address. Leave the string empty if you do not have a voice mailbox.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
177
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
SIP MinimumTLSVersion
SIP Proxy [1..4] Address
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
The Proxy Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy. It is possible
to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and
UDP but another one can be provided.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.0
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Default value: ""
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
Value space: String (0..255)
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
SIP TlsVerify
SIP PreferredIPMedia
For TLS connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. This can be done
from the web interface.
Define the preferred IP version for sending and receiving media (audio, video, data). Only
applicable when both Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual,
and the network does not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Default value: IPv4
Value space: Off/On
Off: Set to Off to allow TLS connections without verifying them. The TLS connections
are allowed to be set up without verifying the x.509 certificate received from the server
against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no SIP CA-list has been
uploaded.
Value space: IPv4/IPv6
IPv4: The preferred IP version for media is IPv4.
IPv6: The preferred IP version for media is IPv6.
On: Set to On to verify TLS connections. Only TLS connections to servers, whose x.509
certificate is validated against the CA-list, will be allowed.
SIP PreferredIPSignaling
Define the preferred IP version for signaling (audio, video, data). Only applicable when both
Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual, and the network does
not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version. It also determines the priority
of the A/AAAA lookups in DNS, so that the preferred IP version is used for registration.
SIP Turn DiscoverMode
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the discover mode to enable/disable the application to search for available Turn
servers in DNS. Before making calls, the system will test if port allocation is possible.
Default value: IPv4
Default value: On
Value space: IPv4/IPv6
Value space: Off/On
IPv4: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv4.
Off: Set to Off to disable discovery mode.
IPv6: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv6.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
On: When set to On, the system will search for available Turn servers in DNS, and before
making calls the system will test if port allocation is possible.
178
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
SIP Turn DropRflx
SIP Turn Password
DropRflx will make the endpoint force media through the Turn relay, unless the remote
endpoint is on the same network.
Define the password needed for accessing the TURN server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: String (0, 128)
Value space: Off/On
A valid password.
Off: Disable DropRflx.
On: The system will force media through the Turn relay when the remote endpoint is on
another network.
SIP Type
Enables SIP extensions and special behavior for a vendor or provider.
SIP Turn Server
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Standard
Define the address of the TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) server. It is used as a media
relay fallback and it is also used to discover the endpoint's own public IP address.
Value space: Standard/Cisco
Requires user role: ADMIN
Standard: Use this when registering to standard SIP Proxy (tested with Cisco
TelePresence VCS).
Default value: ""
Cisco: Use this when registering to Cisco Unified Communication Manager.
Value space: String (0..255)
The preferred format is DNS SRV record (e.g. _turn._udp.<domain>), or it can be a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address.
SIP URI
The SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) is the address that is used to identify the video
system. The URI is registered and used by the SIP services to route inbound calls to the
system. The SIP URI syntax is defined in RFC 3261.
SIP Turn UserName
Define the user name needed for accessing the TURN server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
Value space: String (0, 128)
An address (URI) that is compliant with the SIP URI syntax.
A valid user name.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
179
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Standby settings
Standby BootAction
Standby StandbyAction
Define the camera position after a restart of the codec.
Define the camera position when going into standby mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: DefaultCameraPosition
Default value: PrivacyPosition
Value space: None/DefaultCameraPosition/RestoreCameraPosition
Value space: None/PrivacyPosition
None: No action.
None: No action.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera returns to the
position that it had before the restart.
PrivacyPosition: When the video system enters standby, the camera turns to a sideways
position for privacy.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera moves to the
factory default position.
Standby WakeupAction
Standby Control
Define the camera position when leaving standby mode.
Define whether the system should go into standby mode or not.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: RestoreCameraPosition
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: None/RestoreCameraPosition/DefaultCameraPosition
Default value: On
None: No action.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The system will not enter standby mode.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera returns to
the position that it had before entering standby.
On: The system will enter standby mode when the Standby Delay has timed out.
Requires the Standby Delay to be set to an appropriate value.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera moves to
the factory default position.
Standby Delay
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
Define how long (in minutes) the system shall be in idle mode before it goes into standby
mode. Requires the Standby Control to be enabled.
Automatic wake up on motion detection is a feature that will sense when a person walks
into the room. The feature is based on ultrasound detection, and the Proximity Mode setting
must be On to make the feature work.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 10
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (1..480)
Value space: Off/On
Set the standby delay (minutes).
Off: The wake up on motion detection is disabled.
On: When people walk into the room the system will automatically wake up from standby.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
180
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Standby PowerSave
You can reduce the video system's power consumption during out-of-office hours with this
setting. The Power Save mode is an extension to the regular standby mode.
When the video system enters power save mode, power is cut to some of the video
system's modules, for example the integrated cameras. The codec and Touch controller
behaves like in regular standby. The video system wakes up from power save mode when
you tap the touch panel.
Waking up the video system from power save mode takes longer than waking it up from
regular standby, because the cameras must boot. You can make calls right away, but there
is no outgoing video until the cameras has completed their boot process.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Never
Value space: Never/OutsideOfficeHours
Never: The video system will never go into power save mode; only to regular standby.
OutsideOfficeHours: The video system will go into power save mode during out-of-office
hours. You must provide the office hours with the following settings: Time WorkWeek
FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time
WorkDay End.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
181
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SystemUnit settings
SystemUnit Name
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url
Define the system name. The system name will be sent as the hostname in a DHCP request
and when the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 50)
Value space: String (0..255)
Define the system name.
The URL to the Cisco Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR).
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The ACR tool will perform standard log analyses.
On: The ACR tool will perform advanced log analyses.
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: No logs will be sent to ACR tool.
On: The logs will automatically be sent to ACR tool.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
182
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Time settings
Time TimeFormat
Define the time format.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 24H
Value space: 24H/12H
24H: Set the time format to 24 hours.
12H: Set the time format to 12 hours (AM/PM).
Time DateFormat
Define the date format.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: DD_MM_YY
Value space: DD_MM_YY/MM_DD_YY/YY_MM_DD
DD_MM_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 30.01.10
MM_DD_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 01.30.10
YY_MM_DD: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 10.01.30
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
183
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Time Zone
Appendices
Miquelon, America/Moncton, America/Monterrey, America/Montevideo, America/Montreal,
America/Montserrat, America/Nassau, America/New_York, America/Nipigon, America/
Nome, America/Noronha, America/North_Dakota/Beulah, America/North_Dakota/Center,
America/North_Dakota/New_Salem, America/Ojinaga, America/Panama, America/
Pangnirtung, America/Paramaribo, America/Phoenix, America/Port-au-Prince, America/
Port_of_Spain, America/Porto_Acre, America/Porto_Velho, America/Puerto_Rico, America/
Rainy_River, America/Rankin_Inlet, America/Recife, America/Regina, America/Resolute,
America/Rio_Branco, America/Rosario, America/Santa_Isabel, America/Santarem,
America/Santiago, America/Santo_Domingo, America/Sao_Paulo, America/Scoresbysund,
America/Shiprock, America/Sitka, America/St_Barthelemy, America/St_Johns, America/
St_Kitts, America/St_Lucia, America/St_Thomas, America/St_Vincent, America/Swift_
Current, America/Tegucigalpa, America/Thule, America/Thunder_Bay, America/Tijuana,
America/Toronto, America/Tortola, America/Vancouver, America/Virgin, America/
Whitehorse, America/Winnipeg, America/Yakutat, America/Yellowknife, Antarctica/Casey,
Antarctica/Davis, Antarctica/DumontDUrville, Antarctica/Macquarie, Antarctica/Mawson,
Antarctica/McMurdo, Antarctica/Palmer, Antarctica/Rothera, Antarctica/South_Pole,
Antarctica/Syowa, Antarctica/Troll, Antarctica/Vostok, Arctic/Longyearbyen, Asia/Aden,
Asia/Almaty, Asia/Amman, Asia/Anadyr, Asia/Aqtau, Asia/Aqtobe, Asia/Ashgabat, Asia/
Ashkhabad, Asia/Baghdad, Asia/Bahrain, Asia/Baku, Asia/Bangkok, Asia/Barnaul, Asia/
Beirut, Asia/Bishkek, Asia/Brunei, Asia/Calcutta, Asia/Chita, Asia/Choibalsan, Asia/
Chongqing, Asia/Chungking, Asia/Colombo, Asia/Dacca, Asia/Damascus, Asia/Dhaka, Asia/
Dili, Asia/Dubai, Asia/Dushanbe, Asia/Gaza, Asia/Harbin, Asia/Hebron, Asia/Ho_Chi_Minh,
Asia/Hong_Kong, Asia/Hovd, Asia/Irkutsk, Asia/Istanbul, Asia/Jakarta, Asia/Jayapura, Asia/
Jerusalem, Asia/Kabul, Asia/Kamchatka, Asia/Karachi, Asia/Kashgar, Asia/Kathmandu, Asia/
Katmandu, Asia/Khandyga, Asia/Kolkata, Asia/Krasnoyarsk, Asia/Kuala_Lumpur, Asia/
Kuching, Asia/Kuwait, Asia/Macao, Asia/Macau, Asia/Magadan, Asia/Makassar, Asia/Manila,
Asia/Muscat, Asia/Nicosia, Asia/Novokuznetsk, Asia/Novosibirsk, Asia/Omsk, Asia/Oral,
Asia/Phnom_Penh, Asia/Pontianak, Asia/Pyongyang, Asia/Qatar, Asia/Qyzylorda, Asia/
Rangoon, Asia/Riyadh, Asia/Saigon, Asia/Sakhalin, Asia/Samarkand, Asia/Seoul, Asia/
Shanghai, Asia/Singapore, Asia/Srednekolymsk, Asia/Taipei, Asia/Tashkent, Asia/Tbilisi,
Asia/Tehran, Asia/Tel_Aviv, Asia/Thimbu, Asia/Thimphu, Asia/Tokyo, Asia/Tomsk, Asia/
Ujung_Pandang, Asia/Ulaanbaatar, Asia/Ulan_Bator, Asia/Urumqi, Asia/Ust-Nera, Asia/
Vientiane, Asia/Vladivostok, Asia/Yakutsk, Asia/Yekaterinburg, Asia/Yerevan, Atlantic/
Azores, Atlantic/Bermuda, Atlantic/Canary, Atlantic/Cape_Verde, Atlantic/Faeroe, Atlantic/
Faroe, Atlantic/Jan_Mayen, Atlantic/Madeira, Atlantic/Reykjavik, Atlantic/South_Georgia,
Atlantic/St_Helena, Atlantic/Stanley, Australia/ACT, Australia/Adelaide, Australia/Brisbane,
Australia/Broken_Hill, Australia/Canberra, Australia/Currie, Australia/Darwin, Australia/Eucla,
Australia/Hobart, Australia/LHI, Australia/Lindeman, Australia/Lord_Howe, Australia/
Melbourne, Australia/NSW, Australia/North, Australia/Perth, Australia/Queensland, Australia/
South, Australia/Sydney, Australia/Tasmania, Australia/Victoria, Australia/West, Australia/
Yancowinna, Brazil/Acre, Brazil/DeNoronha, Brazil/East, Brazil/West, CET, CST6CDT,
Canada/Atlantic, Canada/Central, Canada/East-Saskatchewan, Canada/Eastern, Canada/
Mountain, Canada/Newfoundland, Canada/Pacific, Canada/Saskatchewan, Canada/Yukon,
Chile/Continental, Chile/EasterIsland, Cuba, EET, EST, EST5EDT, Egypt, Eire, Etc/GMT, Etc/
GMT+0, Etc/GMT+1, Etc/GMT+10, Etc/GMT+11, Etc/GMT+12, Etc/GMT+2, Etc/GMT+3, Etc/
Define the time zone for the geographical location of the video system. The information in
the value space is from the tz database, also called the IANA Time Zone Database.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Etc/UTC
Value space: Africa/Abidjan, Africa/Accra, Africa/Addis_Ababa, Africa/Algiers, Africa/
Asmara, Africa/Asmera, Africa/Bamako, Africa/Bangui, Africa/Banjul, Africa/Bissau, Africa/
Blantyre, Africa/Brazzaville, Africa/Bujumbura, Africa/Cairo, Africa/Casablanca, Africa/Ceuta,
Africa/Conakry, Africa/Dakar, Africa/Dar_es_Salaam, Africa/Djibouti, Africa/Douala, Africa/
El_Aaiun, Africa/Freetown, Africa/Gaborone, Africa/Harare, Africa/Johannesburg, Africa/
Juba, Africa/Kampala, Africa/Khartoum, Africa/Kigali, Africa/Kinshasa, Africa/Lagos, Africa/
Libreville, Africa/Lome, Africa/Luanda, Africa/Lubumbashi, Africa/Lusaka, Africa/Malabo,
Africa/Maputo, Africa/Maseru, Africa/Mbabane, Africa/Mogadishu, Africa/Monrovia, Africa/
Nairobi, Africa/Ndjamena, Africa/Niamey, Africa/Nouakchott, Africa/Ouagadougou, Africa/
Porto-Novo, Africa/Sao_Tome, Africa/Timbuktu, Africa/Tripoli, Africa/Tunis, Africa/
Windhoek, America/Adak, America/Anchorage, America/Anguilla, America/Antigua,
America/Araguaina, America/Argentina/Buenos_Aires, America/Argentina/Catamarca,
America/Argentina/ComodRivadavia, America/Argentina/Cordoba, America/Argentina/Jujuy,
America/Argentina/La_Rioja, America/Argentina/Mendoza, America/Argentina/Rio_
Gallegos, America/Argentina/Salta, America/Argentina/San_Juan, America/Argentina/
San_Luis, America/Argentina/Tucuman, America/Argentina/Ushuaia, America/Aruba,
America/Asuncion, America/Atikokan, America/Atka, America/Bahia, America/Bahia_
Banderas, America/Barbados, America/Belem, America/Belize, America/Blanc-Sablon,
America/Boa_Vista, America/Bogota, America/Boise, America/Buenos_Aires, America/
Cambridge_Bay, America/Campo_Grande, America/Cancun, America/Caracas, America/
Catamarca, America/Cayenne, America/Cayman, America/Chicago, America/Chihuahua,
America/Coral_Harbour, America/Cordoba, America/Costa_Rica, America/Creston,
America/Cuiaba, America/Curacao, America/Danmarkshavn, America/Dawson, America/
Dawson_Creek, America/Denver, America/Detroit, America/Dominica, America/Edmonton,
America/Eirunepe, America/El_Salvador, America/Ensenada, America/Fort_Nelson,
America/Fort_Wayne, America/Fortaleza, America/Glace_Bay, America/Godthab, America/
Goose_Bay, America/Grand_Turk, America/Grenada, America/Guadeloupe, America/
Guatemala, America/Guayaquil, America/Guyana, America/Halifax, America/Havana,
America/Hermosillo, America/Indiana/Indianapolis, America/Indiana/Knox, America/Indiana/
Marengo, America/Indiana/Petersburg, America/Indiana/Tell_City, America/Indiana/Vevay,
America/Indiana/Vincennes, America/Indiana/Winamac, America/Indianapolis, America/
Inuvik, America/Iqaluit, America/Jamaica, America/Jujuy, America/Juneau, America/
Kentucky/Louisville, America/Kentucky/Monticello, America/Knox_IN, America/Kralendijk,
America/La_Paz, America/Lima, America/Los_Angeles, America/Louisville, America/
Lower_Princes, America/Maceio, America/Managua, America/Manaus, America/Marigot,
America/Martinique, America/Matamoros, America/Mazatlan, America/Mendoza, America/
Menominee, America/Merida, America/Metlakatla, America/Mexico_City, America/
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
System
System settings
settings
184
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Time WorkDay Start
GMT+4, Etc/GMT+5, Etc/GMT+6, Etc/GMT+7, Etc/GMT+8, Etc/GMT+9, Etc/GMT-0, Etc/GMT-1,
Etc/GMT-10, Etc/GMT-11, Etc/GMT-12, Etc/GMT-13, Etc/GMT-14, Etc/GMT-2, Etc/GMT-3,
Etc/GMT-4, Etc/GMT-5, Etc/GMT-6, Etc/GMT-7, Etc/GMT-8, Etc/GMT-9, Etc/GMT0, Etc/
Greenwich, Etc/UCT, Etc/UTC, Etc/Universal, Etc/Zulu, Europe/Amsterdam, Europe/Andorra,
Europe/Astrakhan, Europe/Athens, Europe/Belfast, Europe/Belgrade, Europe/Berlin, Europe/
Bratislava, Europe/Brussels, Europe/Bucharest, Europe/Budapest, Europe/Busingen,
Europe/Chisinau, Europe/Copenhagen, Europe/Dublin, Europe/Gibraltar, Europe/Guernsey,
Europe/Helsinki, Europe/Isle_of_Man, Europe/Istanbul, Europe/Jersey, Europe/Kaliningrad,
Europe/Kiev, Europe/Kirov, Europe/Lisbon, Europe/Ljubljana, Europe/London, Europe/
Luxembourg, Europe/Madrid, Europe/Malta, Europe/Mariehamn, Europe/Minsk, Europe/
Monaco, Europe/Moscow, Europe/Nicosia, Europe/Oslo, Europe/Paris, Europe/Podgorica,
Europe/Prague, Europe/Riga, Europe/Rome, Europe/Samara, Europe/San_Marino, Europe/
Sarajevo, Europe/Simferopol, Europe/Skopje, Europe/Sofia, Europe/Stockholm, Europe/
Tallinn, Europe/Tirane, Europe/Tiraspol, Europe/Ulyanovsk, Europe/Uzhgorod, Europe/
Vaduz, Europe/Vatican, Europe/Vienna, Europe/Vilnius, Europe/Volgograd, Europe/Warsaw,
Europe/Zagreb, Europe/Zaporozhye, Europe/Zurich, GB, GB-Eire, GMT, GMT+0, GMT-0,
GMT0, Greenwich, HST, Hongkong, Iceland, Indian/Antananarivo, Indian/Chagos, Indian/
Christmas, Indian/Cocos, Indian/Comoro, Indian/Kerguelen, Indian/Mahe, Indian/Maldives,
Indian/Mauritius, Indian/Mayotte, Indian/Reunion, Iran, Israel, Jamaica, Japan, Kwajalein,
Libya, MET, MST, MST7MDT, Mexico/BajaNorte, Mexico/BajaSur, Mexico/General, NZ,
NZ-CHAT, Navajo, PRC, PST8PDT, Pacific/Apia, Pacific/Auckland, Pacific/Bougainville,
Pacific/Chatham, Pacific/Chuuk, Pacific/Easter, Pacific/Efate, Pacific/Enderbury, Pacific/
Fakaofo, Pacific/Fiji, Pacific/Funafuti, Pacific/Galapagos, Pacific/Gambier, Pacific/
Guadalcanal, Pacific/Guam, Pacific/Honolulu, Pacific/Johnston, Pacific/Kiritimati, Pacific/
Kosrae, Pacific/Kwajalein, Pacific/Majuro, Pacific/Marquesas, Pacific/Midway, Pacific/Nauru,
Pacific/Niue, Pacific/Norfolk, Pacific/Noumea, Pacific/Pago_Pago, Pacific/Palau, Pacific/
Pitcairn, Pacific/Pohnpei, Pacific/Ponape, Pacific/Port_Moresby, Pacific/Rarotonga, Pacific/
Saipan, Pacific/Samoa, Pacific/Tahiti, Pacific/Tarawa, Pacific/Tongatapu, Pacific/Truk,
Pacific/Wake, Pacific/Wallis, Pacific/Yap, Poland, Portugal, ROC, ROK, Singapore, Turkey,
UCT, US/Alaska, US/Aleutian, US/Arizona, US/Central, US/East-Indiana, US/Eastern, US/
Hawaii, US/Indiana-Starke, US/Michigan, US/Mountain, US/Pacific, US/Pacific-New, US/
Samoa, UTC, Universal, W-SU, WET, Zulu
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "07:00"
Value space: String (5, 5)
The working day start time, using the 24-hour clock.
Time WorkDay End
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "18:00"
Value space: String (5, 5)
The working day end time, using the 24-hour clock.
Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek
Select a time zone from the list.
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Monday
Value space: Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The first day of the working week.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
185
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Friday
Value space: Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The last day of the working week.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
186
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface settings
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
UserInterface ContactInfo Type
You can enable an incoming call notification with amplified visuals. The screen and Touch
10 will flash red/white approximately once every second (1.75 Hz) to make it easier for
hearing impaired users to notice an incoming call. If the system is already in a call the
screen will not flash as this will disturb the on-going call, instead you will get a normal
notification on screen and touch panel.
Choose which type of contact information to show in the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/
SystemName
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Default
Auto: Show the address which another system should dial to reach this video system.
The address depends on the default call protocol and system registration.
Value space: AmplifiedVisuals/Default
None: Do not show any contact information.
AmplifiedVisuals: Enable the amplified visuals on screen and touch panel when the video
system receives a call.
IPv4: Show the system's IPv4 address.
IPv6: Show the system's IPv6 address.
Default: Enable the default behavior with a notification on screen and touch panel.
H323Id: Show the system's H.323 ID (refer to the H323 H323Alias ID setting).
H320Number: Show the system's H.320 number as contact information (only supported
if used with Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link).
E164Alias: Show the system's H.323 E164 Alias as contact information (refer to the H323
H323Alias E164 setting).
SipUri: Show the system's SIP URI (refer to the SIP URI setting).
SystemName: Show the system's name (refer to the SystemUnit Name setting).
DisplayName: Show the system's display name (refer to the SIP DisplayName setting).
UserInterface CustomMessage
A custom message can be displayed, in the lower left side of the screen, in awake mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
Add a custom message. Add an empty string to remove a custom message.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
187
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface KeyTones Mode
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator
You can configure the system to make a keyboard click sound effect (key tone) when typing
text or numbers.
Define for how long the encryption indicator is shown on screen. The icon for encrypted
calls is a locked padlock.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Default value: Auto
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Auto/AlwaysOn/AlwaysOff
Off: There is no key tone sound effect.
Auto: If the call is encrypted, a "Call is encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
On: The key tone sound effect is turned on.
If the call is not encrypted, a "Call is not encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
No encryption indicator icon is shown.
UserInterface Language
AlwaysOn: The “Call is encrypted” notification is shown for 5 seconds. Then, an
encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
Select the language to be used in the user interface. If the language is not supported, the
default language (English) will be used.
AlwaysOff: The encryption indicator is never displayed on screen.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
Default value: English
A custom message can be displayed in the middle of the main screen when the system is
in the half wake state. The custom message will replace the default message, which gives
instructions how to start using the video system. You can also delete the default message,
without adding a custom message.
Value space: Arabic/Catalan/ChineseSimplified/ChineseTraditional/Czech/Danish/Dutch/
English/EnglishUK/Finnish/French/FrenchCanadian/German/Hebrew/Hungarian/Italian/
Japanese/Korean/Norwegian/Polish/Portuguese/PortugueseBrazilian/Russian/Spanish/
SpanishLatin/Swedish/Turkish
Select a language from the list.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
The custom message. An empty string: Restore the default message. A space only:
There will be no message at all.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
188
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
UserInterface OSD Output
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
Define on which monitor the on-screen information and indicators (OSD) should be
displayed.
The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the
video system's admin password. If this password is blank, anyone can access the settings
in the Settings menu, and for example factory reset the system. If authentication is enabled,
all settings that require authentication have a padlock icon. You will be prompted to enter
the administrator's user name and passphrase when you select the setting. Some settings
do not require authentication, they do not have a padlock icon.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Value space: Auto/1/2/3
Requires user role: ADMIN
Auto: The system sends the on-screen information and indicators to the system's
integrated screen. If the system has two integrated screens, the left monitor is used.
Default value: Unlocked
1-3: The system sends the on-screen information and indicators to the specified output.
Choose n to send the on-screen information and indicators to the system's Output
Connector n.
Value space: Locked/Unlocked
Locked: Authentication with administrator's username and passphrase is required.
Unlocked: No authentication is required.
UserInterface Security Mode
UserInterface Wallpaper
This setting allows you to prevent important system information from being exposed in the
user interface (drop down menu and Settings panel), for example the contact information
and IP addresses of the video system, touch controller, and UCM/VCS registrars. It is
important to note that such information is not hidden when navigating further into the
Settings panel.
Select a background image (wallpaper) for the video screen when idle.
You may upload a custom wallpaper to the video system using the web interface. The
following file formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG. The maximum file size is 4
MByte. When you use a custom wallpaper, the clock and the list of upcoming meetings are
removed from the main display
If you want to fully prevent that people without administrator rights can see the contact
information, IP addresses, MAC address, serial number, and software version, you must
also set the UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode to Locked, and of course have a passphrase
for all user accounts with administrator rights.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Auto/Custom/None
Default value: Normal
Auto: Use the default wallpaper.
Value space: Normal/Strong
None: There is no background image on the screen.
Custom: Use the custom wallpaper as background image on the screen. If no custom
wallpaper is uploaded to the system, the setting will revert to the default value.
Normal: IP addresses and other system information are shown on the user interface.
Strong: Contact information and IP addresses are not displayed on the user interface
(drop down menu and Settings panel).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
189
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
UserManagement settings
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter
UserManagement LDAP Attribute
The LDAP filter is used to determine which users should be granted administrator privileges.
The attribute used to map to the provided username. If not set, sAMAccountName is used.
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: ""
The attribute name.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 1024)
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN
Refer to the LDAP specification for the syntax of this string. Example:
"(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)
(sAMAccountName=username))"
The distinguishing name of the entry at which to start a search (base).
Requires user role: ADMIN
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group
Default value: ""
Members of this AD (Active Directory) group will be given administrator access. This setting
is a shorthand for saying (memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=<group name>).
Value space: String (0..255)
The distinguishing name of the base. Example: "DC=company, DC=com"
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
UserManagement LDAP Encryption
Define how to secure the communication between the video system and the LDAP server.
You can override the port number by using the UserManagement LDAP Server Port setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: LDAPS
The distinguished name of the AD group. Example: "CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com"
Value space: LDAPS/None/STARTTLS
LDAPS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 636 over TLS (Transport Layer Security).
None: Connect to LDAP server on port 389 with no encryption.
STARTTLS: Connect to LDAP server on port 389, then send STARTTLS to enable TLS
encryption.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
190
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion
UserManagement LDAP Server Address
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
Set the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.2
Default value: ""
Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: String (0..255)
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
Appendices
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or hostname.
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
UserManagement LDAP Server Port
Set the port to connect to the LDAP server on. If set to 0, use the default for the selected
protocol (see the UserManagement LDAP Encryption setting).
UserManagement LDAP Mode
The video system supports the use of an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
server as a central place to store and validate user names and passwords. Use this setting
to configure whether or not to use LDAP authentication. Our implementation is tested for
the Microsoft Active Directory (AD) service.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
If you switch on LDAP Mode, make sure to configure the other UserManagement LDAP
settings to suit your setup. Here is a few examples.
The LDAP server port number.
Example 1:
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
When the video system connects to an LDAP server, the server will identify itself to the
video system by presenting its certificate. Use this setting to determine whether or not the
video system will verify the server certificate.
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups,
DC=company, DC=com"
Requires user role: ADMIN
Example 2:
Default value: On
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
Value space: Off/On
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
Off: The video system will not verify the LDAP server’s certificate.
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: "(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com)(sAMAccountName=username))"
On: The video system must verify that the LDAP server’s certificate is signed by a
trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be on the list of trusted CAs that are
uploaded to the system in advance. Use the video system’s web interface to manage the
list of trusted CAs (see more details in the administrator guide).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: LDAP authentication is not allowed.
On: LDAP authentication is allowed.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
191
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video settings
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local
Define the position on screen of the active speaker picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only
takes effect when using a video layout where the active speaker is a PiP, i.e. the Overlay
layout, or possibly a Custom layout (refer to the Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local setting).
The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call, it will have no
effect on the current call.
Select which video layout family to use locally.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Current
Auto: The default layout family, as given in the layout database provided by the system,
will be used as the local layout.
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the local layout. All videos have equal size,
as long as there is space enough on the screen.
Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the local layout. The active
speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.
Current: The position of the active speaker PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a
call.
UpperLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the local layout. The active speaker,
or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
UpperCenter: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center left position.
Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
CentreRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
192
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote
Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl CameraId
Select which video layout family to be used for the remote participants.
The camera ID is a unique identifier of the cameras that are connected to the video input.
Use the xStatus Camera API command to see the IDs of the different cameras.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Default value: Connector n: n Connector 5: 1
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single
Value space: Connector 1,2,3,4: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Connector 5: 1
Auto: The default layout family, as given by the local layout database, will be used as the
remote layout.
Select the ID of the camera.
Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the remote layout. All videos have equal
size, as long as there is space enough on the screen.
Video Input Connector [1..5] CameraControl Mode
Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active
speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.
Define whether the camera that is connected to this video input connector can be
controlled or not.
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active speaker,
or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
Note that camera control is not available for Connector 5 (S-video/Composite).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1, 2, 3: On Connector 4, 5: Off
Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
Value space: Connector 1, 2, 3, 4: Off/On Connector 5: Off
Off: Disable camera control.
On: Enable camera control.
Video DefaultMainSource
Define which video input source to be used as the default main video source when you start
a call.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 1
Value space: 1/2/3/4
Set the source to be used as the default main video source.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
193
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Video Input Connector [4..4] DviType
Video Input Connector [1..5] Name
The official DVI standard supports both digital and analog signals. In most cases the default
AutoDetect setting can detect whether the signal is analog RGB or digital. However, in some
rare cases when DVI-I cables are used (these cables can carry both the analog and digital
signals) the auto detection fails. This setting makes it possible to override the AutoDetect
and select the correct DVI video input.
Define a name for the video input connector.
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1: "Camera 1" Connector 2: "" for single camera systems,
"Camera 2" for dual camera systems Connector 3: "PC (HDMI)" Connector 4: "PC
(VGA)" Connector 5: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0, 50)
Default value: AutoDetect
Name for the video input connector.
Value space: AutoDetect/Digital/AnalogRGB/AnalogYPbPr
AutoDetect: Set to AutoDetect to automatically detect if the signal is analog RGB or
digital.
Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Profile
Digital: Set to Digital to force the DVI video input to Digital when using DVI-I cables with
both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
This setting will not take effect if the corresponding Video Input Connector [n] Quality
setting is set to Sharpness.
AnalogRGB: Set to AnalogRGB to force the DVI video input to AnalogRGB when using
DVI-I cables with both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
The optimal definition profile reflects the lighting conditions in the video conferencing room
and the quality of the camera. The better lighting conditions and the better quality of the
camera, the higher the profile. Generally, the Normal or Medium profiles are recommended.
However, when the lighting conditions are very good, the High profile can be set in order to
increase the resolution for a given call rate. The resolution must be supported by both the
calling and called systems.
AnalogYPbPr: Set to AnalogYPbPr to force the DVI video input to AnalogYPbPr, as the
component (YPbPr) signal cannot be auto detected.
Video Input Connector [1..5] InputSourceType
Use the Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps setting to set the
lowest resolution where 60 fps is allowed. Below this threshold 30 fps is the maximum
frame rate.
Select which type of input source is connected to the video input. For single camera
systems, the integrated camera is connected to Connector 1. For dual camera systems, the
integrated cameras are connected to Connector 1 and Connector 2.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Medium
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1,2: camera Connector 3,4: PC Connector 5: other
Value space: Normal/Medium/High
Normal: Use this profile for a normally to poorly lit environment. Resolutions will be set
rather conservative.
Value space: Connector n: PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/whiteboard/other
PC: Use this when a computer is connected to the video input.
Medium: Requires good and stable lighting conditions and a good quality video input. For
some call rates this leads to higher resolution.
camera: Use this when a camera is connected to the video input.
document_camera: Use this when a document camera is connected to the video input.
High: Requires nearly optimal video conferencing lighting conditions and a good quality
video input in order to achieve a good overall experience. Rather high resolutions will be
used.
mediaplayer: Use this when a media player is connected to the video input.
whiteboard: Use this when a whiteboard camera is connected to the video input.
other: Use this when the other options do not match.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
194
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Input Connector [1..5] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps
Video Input Connector [1..4] PresentationSelection
For each video input, this setting tells the system the lowest resolution where it can transmit
60 fps. So for all resolutions lower than this, the maximum transmitted frame rate would be
30 fps, while above this resolution 60fps would also be possible, if the available bandwidth
is adequate.
Define how the video system will behave when you connect a presentation source to the
video input. In general, any input source can be used as a presentation source; normally,
the main camera will not be used as a presentation source.
If the video system is in standby mode, it will wake up when you connect a presentation
source. Sharing the presentation with the far end requires additional action (select Share on
the user interface) except when this setting is set to AutoShare.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 1280_720
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: 512_288/768_448/1024_576/1280_720/1920_1080/Never
Default value: Connector 1,2: Manual Connector 3,4: OnConnect
512_288: Set the threshold to 512x288.
Value space: Connector 1: Manual Connector 2: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
for single camera systems, and Manual for dual camera systems Connector 3,4:
AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
768_448: Set the threshold to 768x448.
1024_576: Set the threshold to 1024x576.
1280_720: Set the threshold to 1280x720.
AutoShare: While in a call, the content on the video input will automatically be presented
to the far end as well as on the local screen when you connect the cable, or when the
source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from
sleep mode). You do not have to select Share on the user interface. If a presentation
source is already connected when you make or answer a call, you have to manually
select Share on the user interface.
1920_1080: Set the threshold to 1920x1080.
Never: Do not set a threshold for transmitting 60fps.
Desktop: The content on the video input will be presented on the screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). This applies both when idle and in a
call. Also, the content on the video input will stay on the screen when you leave the call,
provided that it was the active input at the time of leaving.
Manual: The content on the video input will not be presented on the screen until you
select Share from the user interface.
OnConnect: The content on the video input will be presented on screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). Otherwise, the behavior is the same
as in manual mode.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
195
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Input Connector [1..5] Quality
Video Input Connector [5] SignalType
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution and
high frame rate. For some video sources it is more important to transmit high frame rate
than high resolution and vice versa. This setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution.
Connector 5 can be used for either S-Video or Composite video input format. Use this
setting to configure which video format the BNC connector(s) are used for.
If a Precision 60 camera is detected by the video system this setting is automatically set to
Motion. If a user changes this setting manually, it will be set back to Motion after a restart or
a camera reconnect.
Default value: Composite
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Composite/YC
Composite: Connector 5 is configured for composite video input. Only the BNC
connector that is labeled "Y" is used.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1,2,5: Motion Connector 3,4: Sharpness
YC: Connector 5 is configured for S-Video input. Both BNC connectors ("Y" and "C")
are used.
Value space: Connector n: Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are present or when there is a
lot of motion in the picture.
Video Input Connector [1..5] Visibility
Define the visibility of the video input connector in the menus on the user interface.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1,2,3: IfSignal Connector 4: Always Connector 5: Never
Video Input Connector [1..4] RGBQuantizationRange
Value space: Connector n: Always/IfSignal/Never
The devices connected to the video input should follow the rules for RGB video quantization
range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this
configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any source.
Always: The menu selection for the video input connector will always be visible on the
user interface.
IfSignal: Yhe menu selection for the video input connector will only be visible when
something is connected to the video input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Never: The input source is not expected to be used as a presentation source, and will
not show up on the user interface.
Default value: Connector 1,2,3: Auto Connector 4: Full
Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on video format according
to CEA-861-E. CE video formats will use limited quantization range levels. IT video
formats will use full quantization range levels.
Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
196
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Video Monitors
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode
A monitor role is assigned to each screen using the Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
setting. The monitor role decides which layout (call participants and presentation) will
appear on the screen that is connected to this output. Screens with the same monitor role
will get the same layout; screens with different monitor roles will have different layouts.
This setting applies only to MX800 Single, Connector [2].
Appendices
This video output (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC).
When this setting is On, the system will use CEC to set the screen in standby when the
system itself enters standby. Likewise the system will wake up the screen when the system
itself wakes up from standby.
The monitor layout mode that is set in the Video Monitors setting should reflect the number
of different layouts you want in your room setup. Note that some screens can be reserved
for presentations.
Note that the different manufacturers uses different marketing names for CEC, for example
Anynet+ (Samsung); Aquos Link (Sharp); BRAVIA Sync (Sony); HDMI-CEC (Hitachi); Kuro
Link (Pioneer); CE-Link and Regza Link (Toshiba); RIHD (Onkyo); HDAVI Control, EZ-Sync,
VIERA Link (Panasonic); EasyLink (Philips); and NetCommand for HDMI (Mitsubishi).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly/TriplePresentationOnly/Triple
Default value: Off
Auto: The number of screens connected to the video system is automatically detected,
and the layout is distributed on the screens according to the monitor role.
Value space: Off/On
Single: The same layout is shown on all screens.
Off: CEC is disabled.
Dual: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First and Second. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First, and the presentation is shown on screens with monitor role Second.
On: CEC is enabled.
DualPresentationOnly: All participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role
First. If a presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on screens with
monitor role Second.
Triple: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First, Second and Third.
Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First, and finally Third. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First and Second, and the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.
TriplePresentationOnly: All participants in the call are distributed on screens with monitor
role First and Second. Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First. If a
presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
197
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location HorizontalOffset
Video Output Connector [1..3] Location VerticalOffset
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These
settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these
outputs.
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These
settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these
outputs.
HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center,
both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is
left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center.
A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical
offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how
far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center,
both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is
left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center.
A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical
offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how
far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the
right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the
right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1
and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1
and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1: -1 Connector 2: 0 Connector 3: 1
Default value: Connector n: 0
Value space: Integer (-100..100)
Value space: Integer (-100..100)
Range: The value must be between -100 and 100.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Range: The value must be between -100 and 100.
198
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video Output Connector [1..3] MonitorRole
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
The monitor role describes which video streams will be shown on the screen connected to
this video output. Together the Video Monitors setting and the MonitorRole settings for all
outputs define which layout (video streams) will be shown on each screen.
This setting applies only to MX800 Single, Connector [2..3].
Devices connected to an HDMI output should follow the rules for RGB video quantization
range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this
configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any display.
Most HDMI displays expects full quantization range.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector n: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/First/Second/Third/PresentationOnly/Recorder
Default value: Full
Auto: The system will detect when a screen is connected, and a monitor role (First,
Second, Third) that corresponds with the Video Monitors setting will be assigned
automatically.
Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
First/Second/Third: Define the role of the screen in a multi-screen setup. In a singlescreen setup, there is no difference between First, Second and Third.
Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on the RGB Quantization
Range bits (Q0, Q1) in the AVI infoframe. If no AVI infoframe is available, RGB quantization
range is selected based on video format according to CEA-861-E.
PresentationOnly: Show presentation video stream if active, and nothing else. Screens/
outputs with this monitor role are disregarded by the Video Monitors setting.
Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Recorder: Show all participants, including the local main video (self-view). If active, also
show the presentation. Screens/outputs with this monitor role are ignored by the Video
Monitors setting.
Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution
Define the position on screen of the presentation picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only
takes effect when the presentation is explicitly minimized to a PiP, for example using the
user interface. The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call,
it will have no effect on the current call.
This setting applies only to MX800 Single, Connector [2..3].
Define the resolution and refresh rate for the connected screen.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector n: Auto
Default value: Current
Value space: Connector n: Auto/1280_720_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_
60/1920_1200_50/1920_1200_60
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Auto: The system will automatically try to set the optimal resolution based on negotiation
with the connected monitor.
Current: The position of the presentation PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
UpperLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
1280_720_50: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
UpperCenter: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper center position.
1280_720_60: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
UpperRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
1920_1080_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
CenterLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the center left position.
1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
CenterRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the center right position.
1920_1200_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
LowerLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
1920_1200_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
LowerRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
199
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Presentation DefaultSource
Video Selfview Default Mode
Define which video input source to use as a default presentation source. This setting may
be used by the API and 3rd party user interfaces. It is not relevant when using the user
interfaces provided by Cisco.
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be displayed on screen after a call. The
position and size of the self-view window is determined by the Video Selfview Default
PIPPosition and the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode settings respectively.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 3
Default value: Current
Value space: 1/2/3/4
Value space: Off/Current/On
The video input source to use as default presentation source.
Off: Self-view is switched off when leaving a call.
Current: Self-view is left as is, i.e. if it was on during the call, it remains on after the call;
if it was off during the call, it remains off after the call.
Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode
On: Self-view is switched on when leaving a call.
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be shown in full screen or as a small
picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched
on (see the Video Selfview Default Mode setting).
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole
Define which screen/output to display the main video source (self-view) after a call. The
value reflects the monitor roles set for the different outputs in the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Current
The setting applies both when self-view is displayed in full screen, and when it is displayed
as picture-in-picture (PiP).
Value space: Off/Current/On
Off: Self-view will be shown as a PiP.
Current: The size of the self-view picture will be kept unchanged when leaving a call, i.e.
if it was a PiP during the call, it remains a PiP after the call; if it was fullscreen during the
call, it remains fullscreen after the call.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
On: The self-view picture will be shown in fullscreen.
Value space: Current/First/Second/Third
Default value: Current
Current: When leaving a call, the self-view picture will be retained on the same output as
it was during the call.
First: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector [n]
MonitorRole set to First.
Second: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output
Connector [n] MonitorRole set to Second.
Third: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole set to Third.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
200
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Selfview Default PIPPosition
Video Selfview OnCall Duration
Define the position on screen of the small self-view picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call.
The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview
Default Mode setting) and fullscreen view is switched off (see the Video Selfview Default
FullscreenMode setting).
This setting only has an effect when the Video Selfview OnCall Mode setting is switched
On. In this case, the number of seconds set here determines for how long self-view is
shown before it is automatically switched off.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 10
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Current
Value space: Integer (1..60)
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Range: Choose for how long self-view remains on. The valid range is between 1 and 60
seconds.
Current: The position of the self-view PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
UpperLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
UpperCenter: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the center left position.
CentreRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
Video Selfview OnCall Mode
This setting is used to switch on self-view for a short while when setting up a call. The
Video Selfview OnCall Duration setting determines for how long it remains on. This applies
when self-view in general is switched off.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Self-view is not shown automatically during call setup.
On: Self-view is shown automatically during call setup.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
201
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Experimental settings
The Experimental settings are for testing only and should not be used unless agreed with
Cisco. These settings are not documented and WILL change in later releases.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
202
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Appendices
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
203
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
How to use Touch 10
The Touch 10 user interface and its use are described in
full detail in the User guide for the video system.
Tap ? to contact Help desk or access other
facility services, if available.
Tap the system name or contact
information to access System
Information, Settings, Restart
and Factory reset. You can also
activate Call forwarding, Standby,
and Do not disturb modes.
Time of day.
Tap Call to make a
call, and to invoke the
Favorites, Directory and
Recents contact lists.
Tap Share to start
sharing content and to
conduct presentations.
Tap Messages to invoke
the voice mail system, if
available.
Entry point for user interface
extensions (your system
may have zero or more such
buttons with different color,
text and icons).
Press and hold the
left side of the Volume
button to decrease the
loudspeaker volume and
the right side to increase
the volume.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Tap the Camera icon to activate
self-view and camera control.
Press the Microphone
button to mute and unmute
microphones.
204
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Set up remote monitoring
Requirement:
•
RemoteMonitoring option
Remote monitoring is useful when you want to control the video
system from another location.
Snapshots from input sources appear in the web interface, so you
can check the camera view and control the camera without being
in the room.
If enabled, snapshots are refreshed automatically approximately
every 5 seconds.
Check whether or not the video system has the
RemoteMonitoring option
About snapshots
1. Sign in to the web interface.
Local input sources
2. Check the Home page to see if RemoteMonitoring is on the
list of Installed options.
Snapshots of the local input sources
of the video system appear on the Call
Control page.
If not on the list, remote monitoring is not available.
Snapshots appear both when the video
system is idle, and when in a call.
Enable remote monitoring
Install the RemoteMonitoring option key. How to install option keys
are described in the ► Add option keys chapter.
PLEASE BE AWARE THAT IF YOU ENABLE THE REMOTE MONITORING
OPTION YOU MUST MAKE SURE THAT YOU COMPLY WITH LOCAL
LAWS AND REGULATIONS WITH REGARD TO PRIVACY AND PROVIDE
ADEQUATE NOTICE TO USERS OF THE SYSTEM THAT THE SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR MAY MONITOR AND CONTROL THE CAMERA AND
SCREEN. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH PRIVACY
REGULATIONS WHEN USING THE SYSTEM AND CISCO DISCLAIMS ALL
LIABILITY FOR ANY UNLAWFUL USE OF THIS FEATURE.
Far end snapshots
When in call, you may also see snapshots
from the far end camera. It does not
matter whether or not the far end video
system has the RemoteMonitoring option.
Far end snapshots are not displayed if the
call is encrypted.
Automatically refresh snapshots
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
205
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface
Notification of an incoming call
Click the Call indicator to open the Call
Control page, where you can accept or
decline the call.
The system is in a call
Hover the mouse over the call indicator
to see the number of active calls.
Control the call
Call indicator
Relevant control buttons are present on the
Call Control page. Use the buttons to:
The call indicator is present to notify you about an incoming call,
and to show when the system is in a call.
Show call details
If the system is idle, there is no call indicator.
Put the call on hold
Answer the call
Disconnect the call
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
206
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Place a call using the web interface (page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Send DTMF tones
Place a call
Click to open a key pad that you can use if your application
requires DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) signaling.
Even if the web interface is used to initiate the call, it is the
video system (display, microphones and loudspeakers)
that is used for the call; it is not the PC running the web
interface.
1. Navigate the Favorites, Directory or Recents lists to find the
correct entry; or enter one or more characters in the Search
or Dial field*. Click the correct contact name.
2. Click Call in the contact card.
Alternatively, enter the complete URI or number in the Search and
Dial field. Then click the Call button that appears next to the URI
or number.
Show/hide call details
Click the information button to show details about the
call.
Click the button again to hide the information.
Hold and resume a call
Use the
button next to a participant’s name to put
that participant on hold.
To resume the call, use the
button that is present
when a participant is on hold.
End a call
If you want to terminate a call or conference, click
Disconnect all. Confirm your choice in the dialog that
appears.
*
When searching, matching entries from the Favorites, Directory and Recents
lists will be listed as you type.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
To disconnect just one participant in a conference,
click the
button for that participant.
207
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Place a call using the web interface (page 2 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Calling more than one
A point-to-point video call (a call involving two parties only) can
be expanded to include one more participant on audio-only.
If your system is using the optional built-in MultiSite feature, up
to five participants, yourself included, can join the video call
(conference). In addition, one more participant can join on audioonly.
Follow the same procedure to call the next conference participant
as you did when calling the first participant.
Calling more than one using a conference bridge (CUCM ad hoc
conferencing) is not supported from the web interface, even if it is
supported by the video system itself.
Adjust the volume
Mute the microphone
Click Microphone: On to mute the microphone.
Then the text changes to Microphone: Off.
Click Microphone: Off to unmute.
Volume down
Volume up
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
208
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Share content using the web interface
About content sharing
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Share content
Presentation source
drop down list
1. Choose which content source to share in
the Presentation source drop down list.
Choose which input
source to share, from the
drop down list.
2. Click Start Presentation. Then the text
changes to Stop Presentation.
Stop content sharing:
Click the Stop Presentation button that is
present while sharing.
Snapshot area
Shows snapshots of the
selected presentation
source.
You can connect a presentation source
to one of the video inputs of your video
system. Most often a PC is used as
presentation source, but other options
may be available depending on your
system setup.
While in a call you can share content with
the other participant(s) in the call (far
end).
If you are not in a call, the content is
shown locally.
Only available on video
systems that have the
Remote Monitoring
option.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
209
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Local layout control
About layouts
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
The term layout is used to describe the
various ways presentations and videos
can appear on the screens. Different
types of meetings may require different
layouts.
The number of call or conference
participants are reflected in the available
choices.
Change the layout
Click Layout, and choose your preferred
layout in the window that opens.
The set of layouts to choose from
depends on the system configuration.
You may change the layout both when idle
and in a call.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
210
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Control a local camera
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Prerequisites
•
The Video > Input > Connector n > CameraControl >
Mode setting is switched On .
•
The camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality.
•
Speaker tracking is switched Off.
Main source drop down list
Choose which camera to control from
the drop down list.
Snapshot area
Shows snapshots of the selected main input source.
Only available on video systems that have the
Remote Monitoring option.
Automatically refresh snapshots
Move the camera to a preset position
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main
source drop down list.
2. Click Presets... to open a list of available
presets.
Move the camera using the pan/tilt/zoom controls
Camera control is not available when speaker tracking is
switched on.
If no presets are defined, the button is
disabled and named No presets.
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main source drop
down list.
3. Click a preset’s name to move the camera to
the preset position.
2. Click the camera icon to open the camera control
window.
4. Click Close to close the window.
Video snapshots from the room are only displayed for
video systems that have the Remote Monitoring option.
You cannot use the web interface to
define a preset; you should use the
Touch controller.
3. Use the left and right arrows to pan the camera; the up
and down arrows to tilt it; and + and - to zoom in and out.
When you select a preset, speaker
tracking will be switched off
automatically.
Only relevant controls appear in the window.
4. Click Close to close the window.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
211
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Control a far end camera
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Prerequisites
While in a call, you can control the remote participant’s camera
(far end) provided that:
•
The Conference > FarEndControl > Mode setting is switched
On on the far end video system.
•
The far end camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality. Only
the relevant controls will appear.
•
Speaker tracking is not switched On on the far end camera.
•
The local video system has the Remote Monitoring option.
Control the remote participant’s camera
1. Click the camera icon to open the remote
camera control window.
2. Use the left and right arrows to pan the
camera; the up and down arrows to tilt it; and
+ and - to zoom in and out.
If you are not allowed to control the far end
camera, the controls will not appear in the
image.
If the call is encrypted, the far end snapshot
behind the controls are not displayed.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
212
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Packet loss resilience - ClearPath
ClearPath introduces several mechanisms for advanced packet
loss resilience. These mechanisms increase the experienced
quality when you use your video system in an error prone
environment.
ClearPath is a Cisco proprietary protocol. All endpoints running
CE software support ClearPath.
If the involved endpoints and infrastructure elements support
ClearPath, all packet loss resilience mechanisms are used in
point-to-point connections (including hosted conferences). Only
some of the mechanisms are supported in MultiSite conferences.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
213
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Room analytics
The room analytics feature use several
variables from the conference room
and re-uses them to analyze the room
utilization over time or per call.
People presence detection
The video system has the capability to find whether or not people
are present in the room. It takes a minimum of two minutes to
detect whether people are present or not in the room. After the
room becomes vacant, it may take up to two minutes for the
status to change.
This feature is based on ultrasound. It will not keep record of who
was in the room, only whether or not there are people present in
the room.
You can turn on/off the people presence detection from the web
interface. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration > RoomAnalytics > PeoplePresenceDetector.
Status
You may see the status at a given moment of people’s presence.
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Status >
RoomAnalytics.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
214
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface
You can customize the user interface to allow control of
peripherals in a meeting room, for example lights and blinds, or to
modify the video system’s behavior by triggering macros.
This allows for the powerful combination of a control system’s
functionality and the video system's user-friendly user interface
(Touch 10).
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
In-room control architecture
You need a Cisco video system with a Touch 10 controller, and a
control system. The control system may be a third-party system,
such as Crestron or AMX, with hardware drivers for peripherals.
It is the control system, not the video system, that controls the
peripherals.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands) in order to connect with the
controls on the video system's user interface.
Blinds
API
Touch 10
Climate
Control system
Video system
Example in-room control panel
Consult the CE Customization guide for full details about how to
design custom user interface panels (in-room control panels)
using the In-Room Control editor, and how to use the video
system’s API to program the in-room controls. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Lights
In-room
control
editor
Other...
In-room control schematics
The video system’s macro framework may also serve as a
control system. In this case the control system can use the video
system’s API to trigger all sorts of local functionality: Speed dial,
language selection, customized system reset, and much more.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
215
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface
The room simulator
Free of charge editor
Preview function
An easy to use drag-and-drop editor, which you should
use to compose the custom user interface panels (inroom control panels), comes free of charge with the video
system’s software.
The editor also provides a preview function, which allows
you to see how the custom interfaces will appear on the
user interface.
•
Click Launch Editor to launch the editor directly from
the video system’s web interface.
You can push a new in-room control panel to the
video system, and see the result immediately on the
Touch controller.
•
You can use the room simulator to visualise how the inroom controls on the Touch 10 user interface changes the
state of the room.
Back up any existing in-room configuration
you may have before you export the simulator
configuration to the video system. The
simulator configuration will replace the existing
configuration on the video system.
The preview function is also a complete software version
of your custom (in-room control) panels, so clicking the
controls will result in the same actions as selecting them
on the real Touch 10 user interface.
Therefore, you can use the preview function to test your
integrations without having a real Touch 10 user interface
available. You can also use the video system’s in-room
controls from a remote location
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
In‑Room Control.
•
Click Launch Simulator to open a room simulator in
your browser.
The room simulator contains a predefined in-room
control configuration that you can export to the video
system. Then you can control the simulator’s virtual
meeting room from your real Touch 10 user interface.
Click Download Editor to download a stand-alone
version that you can run locally on your browser from
your hard drive.
•
Then you can compose your custom interfaces
without being connected to a video system. You can
export and import to file to move your work between
your local version and the video system later.
*
Appendices
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
The In-Room Control editor
Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
In‑Room Control.
System settings
Click Load simulator config to export the simulator
configuration to the video system.
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL, INTEGRATOR, or
ADMIN user roles in order to access the In-Room Control editor and
the API commands that you need when programming the control
system.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
216
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customize the video system's behavior using macros
With macros, you can create your own snippets of code that run
on the video system. The language is JavaScript / ECMAScript 6
with support for features such as arrow functions, promises and
classes.
Allow using macros on the video system
The Macro editor
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
The Macro editor is a powerful tool where
you can:
•
The macro framework allows an integrator to write scripts that
tailor a video system's behavior to suite an individual customer's
requirements. The integrators can, for example, implement
their own features or variations of features, automate specific
configurations or re-configurations, and create custom tests and
monitoring functions.
Set Macros > Mode to On.
If you try to launch the Macro editor while this setting is Off, a
pop-up message appears. If you respond by tapping Enable
Macros, the Macros > Mode setting will automatically change
to On, and the editor will launch.
Launch the macro editor
By combining the use of macros and creation of a custom user
interface panel (formerly referred to as in-room control panel), you
can amend the user interface (Touch 10) to trigger customized
local functionality. For examples:
•
Add speed dialling buttons
•
Add a button for room reset, which set all configurations back
to your preferred default setup
Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Macro
Editor.
We don't offer a stand-alone version of the editor that you can
use to work offline.
•
Load our code examples, which
you can modify, use as is, or use as
inspiration when writing your own
macros.
•
Read our detailed macro scripting
tutorial, which also explains the code
examples in more detailed.
•
Write your own macros, and upload
them to the video system.
•
Enable/Disable individual macros.
•
Check in an embedded Log Console
what happens when you run a macro.
Consult the CE Customization guide for details about macros and
how to use the video system's built in Macro editor. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
*
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
You need a user that holds the ADMIN user role in order to access the Macro
editor.
217
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Input source composition
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
(page 1 of 2)
You can use the video system’s API to combine up to four input
sources in a single main video stream.
Source composition
Layouts
The maxmium number of different input sources depends on the
video system:
Composition layout
Equal
Video system
Maximum number of
different input sources
Room Kit, SX20, MX200 G2,
MX300 G2
2
Codec Plus, Room 55,
Room 55 Dual, Room 70
3
SX80, MX700, MX800,
Codec Pro, Room 70 G2
4
SX10, DX70, DX80
Not applicable
You can choose between two layouts:
•
•
Equal
PIP (only available when composing two input sources)
The layouts are fixed, so you cannot modify the image sizes, or
move the PIP.
The composition and layout can be modified at any time, both in
call and outside of call.
Number of sources: 2
Selfview
Selfview shows the same composed image that is being sent to
the far end.
Number of sources: 3
Individual camera control
You can control individual cameras using API commands
(xCommand Camera *), but you cannot use the controls on the
user interface.
When you select a camera in the user interface, the main video
stream will automatically switch from the composed video stream
to the single stream from the chosen camera.
Number of sources: 4
Change compositions and layouts on demand
Input source composition is only available using API commands;
we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand,
we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user
interface panel (in-room control panel) for it.
Number of sources: 2
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
218
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Input source composition
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
API command
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource
ConnectorId: <1..n> SourceId: <1..m>
Layout: <Equal, PIP>
where
The input source can be identified by either
the physical connector that it is connected
to (ConnectorId), or by the logical source
identifier (SourceId). There cannot be a
mix of different types of identifiers in the
same command; use either ConnectorId or
SourceId. You can find these identifiers in
the Video Input Connector and Video Input
Source statuses.
Examples
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 ConnectorId: 3 ConnectorId: 4 Layout: Equal
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 Layout: Equal
The difference between the Equal and PIP
layouts (Layout) are shown in the sidebar.
Refer to the API-guide for more details.
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource SourceId: 1 SourceId: 2 Layout: PIP
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
219
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
Presentation source composition (page 1 of 2)
You can use the video system’s API to combine up to four
presentation sources in a single video stream.
Source composition
Layouts
The maxmium number of different presentation sources depends
on the video system:
Composition layout
Equal
Video system
Maximum number of
different
presentation sources
Room Kit, SX20, MX200 G2,
MX300 G2
2
Codec Plus, Room 55,
Room 55 Dual, Room 70
3
SX80, MX700, MX800,
Codec Pro, Room 70 G2
4
SX10, DX70, DX80
Not applicable
You can only share sources that has been shared through a cable
(DVI, VGA, HDMI - depending on the video system).
The presentation sources will always be composed in Equal
layout. You cannot modify the image sizes.
You can change the number of sources at any time, both in call
and outside of call.
The order in which the sources appear on the screen depends
on the order they have in the command; startng from upper left,
ending at bottom right.
Number of sources: 2
Change compositions and layouts on demand
Presentation source composition is only available using API
commands; we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand,
we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user
interface panel (in-room control panel) for it.
Number of sources: 3
Number of sources: 4
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
220
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Presentation source composition (page 2 of 2)
API command
xCommand Presentation Start
ConnectorId: <1..n>
PresentationSource: <1..m>
Instance: <1..p>
SendingMode: <LocalRemote, LocalOnly>
Examples
xCommand Presentation Start PresentationSource: 1 PresentationSource: 2 PresentationSource: 3 PresentationSource: 4
where
The input source can be identified by either
the physical connector that it is connected
to (ConnectorId), or by the logical source
identifier (PresentationSource). There
cannot be a mix of different types of
identifiers in the same command; use either
ConnectorId or PresentationSource. You
can find these identifiers in the Video Input
Connector and Video Input Source statuses.
xCommand Presentation Start ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 ConnectorId: 3 ConnectorId: 4
Refer to the API-guide for more details.
xCommand Presentation Start PresentationSource: 1 PresentationSource: 2
xCommand Presentation Start ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
221
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Manage startup scripts
About startup scripts
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Startup
Scripts.
A startup script contains commands
(xCommand) and configurations
(xConfiguration) that will be executed as
part of the start up procedure.
A few commands and configurations
cannot be placed in a startup script,
for example xCommand SystemUnit
Boot. It is not possible to save a script
that contains illegal commands and
configurations.
List of startup scripts
You can create one or
more startup scripts*.
A green dot appears next
to an active startup script;
a red ring appears next to
an inactive startup script.
If you have more than one
startup script, they will
run in the order from top
to bottom of the list.
Syntax and semantics for xCommand and
xConfiguration are explained in the API
guide for the product.
The script names and configurations shown in the illustration serve as examples. You may make your own scripts.
Creat a startup script
1. Click Create new....
2. Enter a name for the startup script in
the title input field.
3. Enter the commands (xConfiguration
or xCommand) in the command
input area. Start each command on
a new line.
4. Click Save.
5. Click On to activate the startup
script.
If you want to use an existing script as
a starting point for editing, select that
script and click Copy.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Run a startup script immediately
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click Run.
Both active and inactive startup scripts
can be run immediately.
Activate or deactivate a startup script
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click On to activate, or Off to deactivate a script.
Active startup scripts will run every time the
video system starts up.
Delete a startup script
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click Delete.
222
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Access the video system’s XML files
About the API
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
The XML files are part of the video system’s API. They structure
information about the system in a hierarchy.
•
Configuration.xml contains the current system settings
(configuration). These settings are controlled from the web
interface or from the API (Application Programmer Interface).
•
The information in status.xml is constantly updated by the
video system to reflect system and process changes. The
status information is monitored from the web interface or from
the API.
•
Command.xml contains an overview of the commands
available to instruct the system to perform an action. The
commands are issued from the API.
•
Valuespace.xml contains an overview of all the value spaces
of system settings, status information, and commands.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Open an XML file
Click the file name to open the XML file.
223
The application programming interface
(API) is a tool for integration professionals
and developers working with the video
system. The API is described in detail in
the API guide for the video system.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface
About the API
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
The application programming interface
(API) is a tool for integration professionals
and developers working with the video
system. The API is described in detail in
the API guide for the video system.
Commands (xCommand) and configurations (xConfiguration) can
be executed from the web interface. Syntax and semantics are
explained in the API guide for the video system.
Execute API commands and configurations
1. Enter a command (xCommand or xConfiguration),
or a sequence of commands, in the text area.
2. Click Execute to issue the command(s).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
224
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Notes regarding screen technology
Cisco are using professional screens in MX700 and MX800.
These screens have longer lifetime and operating hours than
consumer screens.
MX700 and MX800 use LED edge backlit LCD panels with
Vertical Alignment technology. This allows for high contrast
ratios and fast response times. The nature of all LCD panels is
that the contrast ratio drops rapidly with an increasing viewing
angle (both horizontally and vertically). Color coordinates will
also change with increased viewing angle resulting in some
color shift. LCD panels may therefore appear to have different
shades when comparing images viewed perpendicular and at
an angle to the screen.
MX700 and MX800 screens are individually color calibrated
during manufacturing using spectrometers. This ensures
that all screens shipped from the manufacturing site are
equal with respect to color reproduction, when judged on
axis. The calibration process has some tolerances, but this
is considered to be hard, if not impossible, to judge with the
naked eye. A small change in the viewing angle will to a larger
extent affect the perceived color differences.
Over time the screen’s LED backlights will drift. This is valid
for all LCD panels with LED backlight. Luminance will decay
resulting in darker image over time. For the LCD panels in
MX700 and MX800, the luminance will be halved after 50000
operating hours.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
225
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
GPIO interface
The codec within the video system has a General Purpose Input/
Output (GPIO) port in the form of a 6 pin Euroblock connector.
Some MX700/MX800 systems have been shipped with
the label for the pins of the GPIO port in reverse order.
Correct GPIO labeling.
Incorrect GPIO labeling.
GPIO port
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
226
Remove the left side
cover to get access to
the connectors.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
Serial interface
The video system has a standard COM-port for serial
communication. Connect a standard 9-pin RS-232 serial cable
to the COM-port. If the computer does not have a standard serial
connector, you need an RS-232 adapter on the computer side.
Computer
COM
(9-pin, male)
USB
RS-232 adapter
COM
(9-pin, female)
COM
(9-pin, male)
Serial cable
Video
system
The serial connection can be used without an IP-address, DNS, or
a network.
Parameters:
•
Baud rate: Configurable. Default 115200 bps
•
Data bits: 8
•
Parity: None
•
Stop bit: 1
•
Hardware flow control: Off
Standard COM-port
(9-pin, female)
Video system settings
Serial communication is enabled by default. Use the following
configuration to change the behavior:
SerialPort > Mode
For security reasons, you are asked to sign in before using the
serial interface. Use the following setting to change the behavior:
SerialPort > LoginRequired
We recommend using the default baud rate because the video
system may give much feedback. Use the following setting if you
want to adjust the baud rate.
SerialPort > BaudRate
Restart the video system when you have made changes to the
serial port settings.
If your video system is provisioned by CUCM, the serial port
settings should be configured from CUCM.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
Remove the left side
cover to get access to
the connectors.
227
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Open TCP Ports
The web server within the codec prohibit or restrict the use of
nonsecure or unnecessary ports, protocols, modules, and/or
services. Some ports are open or closed by default.
TCP 22: SSH
You can close the port by setting SSH mode to Off.
TCP 4051: Remote pairing session connection
The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is
remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
NetworkServices SSH Mode: Off / On
TCP 4052: Remote pairing and forwarding
TCP 80: HTTP
The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is
remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off.
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off or HTTPS.
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off
TCP 443: HTTPS
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off.
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off
TCP 4043: Remote pairing software download
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 4045: Remote pairing version information
The system settings are configured from
the Setup > Configuration page on the
web interface. Open a web browser and
enter the IP address of the video system
then sign in.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 4053: Remote pairing port
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 5060/5061: SIP listen ports
The SIP listen pors are open by default. The SIP listen ports are
disabled by the Cisco UCM (Unified Communication Manager).
You can close the ports by setting the SIP listen ports to Off.
SIP ListenPort: Off / On
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
228
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS
When a video system is added to Cisco TelePresence
Management Suite (TMS), it is automatically configured to
send information (events) back to TMS. The video system
receives the address that these events should be sent to from
TMS (HTTPFeedback address). If this address is absent or
misconfigured, the video system cannot send events to TMS.
Missing response to events
If the video system does not receive a response to an event, it will
retry sending it to the HTTPFeedback address up to 10 times at 1
second intervals.
If the video system does not receive a response to any of the
retries, the endpoint deletes the HTTPFeedback address and
cannot send events to TMS anymore.
This causes loss of Call Detail Records (CDR) on TMS.
Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS
In order to get a new address to send events to, you must restart
the video system and wait for the next management address push
from TMS (scheduled or triggered by the TMS administrator).
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
229
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 1 of 4)
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
MX700 and MX800 Single:
• Cisco TelePresence Software Version TC7.1.2 or
later
• Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 8.0 or later
•
•
•
•
Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
Viewing angle: ± 176°
Response time: Typical 8 ms
Brightness: 350 cd/m2
PC AND SECOND-SOURCE VIDEO INPUT
• DVI-I
• Two HDMI (if Dual camera option is installed, only
one HDMI)
• One standard definition (composite or S-video)
MX800 Dual:
• Cisco TelePresence Software Version TC7.3.1 or
later
• Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 8.0 or later
SUPPORTED PC INPUT RESOLUTIONS
COMPONENTS
• SVGA (800 x 600) up to 1080p (1920 x 1080)
Fully integrated unit including:
• Codec
• Display
• Camera (2 cameras as option)
• Loudspeakers
• Cisco TelePresence Table Microphone 60 (two
microphones are included in base package)
• Cables included: DVI-I-to-VGA cable with Euroblock
to 3.5-mm jack audio cable, HDMI to HDMI, LAN
cable, and power cable
DISPLAY
MX700:
• Two 55 inch TFT-LCD monitors, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
• Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
• Viewing angle: ±178°
• Response time: Typical 8 ms
• Brightness: Typical 350 cd/m2
MX800 Single:
• One 70 inch TFT-LCD monitor, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
• Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
• Viewing angle: ± 176°
• Response time: Typical 8 ms
• Brightness: 350 cd/m2
CAMERA OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20x total zoom (10x optical,2x digital zoom)
Motorized +12.7°/-14.5° tilt, +58°/-90° pan
80° horizontal field of view
48.8° vertical field of view
F 1.5
Resolutions: 1080p60 and 720p60
Automatic or manual focus, brightness, and white
balance
• Far-end camera control
• Camera control over Ethernet
• Focus distance 3.28 ft (1 m) to infinity
AUDIO SYSTEM
Integrated multichannel loudspeaker system
MX700 with single camera:
• 12 loudspeakers in total
• 10 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced dual driver folded bass horns (one
behind each screen)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 65-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 55-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Dual:
• Two 70 inch TFT-LCD monitor, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
MX700 with dual camera:
• 11 loudspeakers in total
• 9 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced dual driver folded bass horns (one
behind each screen)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 65-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 55-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Single with single camera:
• 7 loudspeakers in total
• 6 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 1 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meter long)
• 200 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Single with dual camera:
• 6 loudspeakers in total
• 5 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 1 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meters long)
• 200 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Dual:
• 13 loudspeakers in total
• 11 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meters long)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
230
USER INTERFACE
Cisco Touch 10 interface
• 10 inch projected capacitive touch screen
• Resolution: 1280 x 800
LANGUAGE SUPPORT
(depends on software version)
• Arabic, Catalan, Chinese-Simplified, ChineseTraditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, EnglishUK, Finnish, French, French-Canadian, German,
Hebrew, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, PortugueseBrazilian, Russian, Spanish, Spanish-Latin, Swedish,
Turkish
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
• Support for the Cisco TelePresence Management
Suite (TMS)
• Total management via embedded Telnet, SSH, XML
and SOAP
• Remote software upload via web server, SCP, HTTP
and HTTPS
• One RS-232 for local control and diagnostics
• Support for Cisco Touch 10
DIRECTORY SERVICES
• Support for local directories (Favorites / Local
contacts)
• Corporate directory (through CUCM and Cisco
TMS)
• Server directory supporting LDAP and H.350
(requires Cisco TMS)
• Call history with received, placed and missed calls
with date and time
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 2 of 4)
POWER
PRODUCT DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
MX700:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 129 W/140 W
• Average power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 547 W/560 W (under normal operating
conditions as defined in IEC 60950-1)
• Maximum power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 567 W/580 W
MX700, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 64.2 in. (163.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight, single camera: 339.5 lbs (154 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 348.3 lbs (158 kg)
MX800 Single:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 106 W/118 W
• Average power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 320 W/333 W (under normal operating
conditions as defined in IEC 60950-1)
• Max power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 330 W/343 W
MX800 Dual:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption dual camera: 157 W
• Average power consumption dual camera: 570 W
(under normal operating conditions as defined in
IEC 60950-1)
• Max power consumption dual camera: 590 W
OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY:
• Ambient temperature: 32°F to 104°F
(0°C to 40°C)
• Relative humidity (RH): 10% to 90%
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE:
• –4°F to 140°F (–20°C to 60°C) at RH 10% to 90%
(non-condensing)
MX700, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 64.2 in. (163.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 339.5 lbs (154 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 348.3 lbs (158 kg)
MX700, wall mount:
• Height: 42.2 in. (107.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 357.1 lbs (162 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 366.0 lbs (166 kg)
MX800 Single, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight, single camera: 244.7 lbs (111 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 253.5 lbs (115 kg)
MX800 Dual, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight: 524.7 lbs (238 kg)
MX800 Dual, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight: 524.7 lbs (238 kg)
MX800 Dual, wall mount:
• Height: 49.5 in. (125.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight: 537.9 lbs (244 kg)
•
•
•
•
Directive 2014/35/EU (Low-Voltage Directive)
Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Directive) – Class A
Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)
Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
• NRTL approved (Product Safety)
• FCC CFR 47 Part 15B (EMC) – Class A
Please check the Product Approval Status Database
at http://www.ciscofax.com for approval documents
per country.
PACKAGING DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
MX700:
• Height: 62.2 in. (158.0 cm)
• Depth: 30.5 in. (77.5 cm)
• Width: 61.7 in. (156.7 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 498.2 lbs (226 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 511.5 lbs (232 kg)
MX800 Single:
• Height: 59.1 in. (150.0 cm)
• Depth: 26.4 in. (67.0 cm)
• Width: 72.8 in. (185.0 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 361.6 lbs (164 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 374.8 lbs (170 kg)
MX800 Single, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 240.3 lbs (109 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 249.1 lbs (113 kg)
MX800 Dual:
• Height: 59.1 in. (150.0 cm)
• Depth: 34.6 in. (88.0 cm)
• Width: 72.8 in. (185.0 cm)
• Weight: 705.5 lbs (320 kg)
MX800 Single, wall mount:
• Height: 49.52 in. (125.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 240.3 lbs (109 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 249.1 lbs (113 kg)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE
231
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 3 of 4)
PRODUCT CAPABILITIES
PRODUCT DELIVERED COMPLETE WITH:
• One mounting option, single or dual camera option,
Cisco Touch 10, codec, complete audio system,
2 × Cisco Microphone 60, two presentation cables.
BANDWIDTH
• H.323 and SIP up to 6 Mbps point-to-point
• Up to 6 Mpbs total MultiSite bandwidth
MINIMUM BANDWIDTH FOR RESOLUTION / FRAME
RATE (H.264)
•
•
•
•
720p30 from 768 kbps
720p60 from 1152 kbps
1080p30 from 1472 kbps
1080p60 from 2560 kbps
FIREWALL TRAVERSAL
• Cisco TelePresence Expressway technology
• H.460.18 and H.460.19 firewall traversal
• SIP ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment)
VIDEO STANDARDS
• H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.264
• H.265 (SIP)
VIDEO FEATURES
• Advanced screen layouts
• Local auto layout
VIDEO INPUTS (FIVE INPUTS)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
HDCP is not supported
Three HDMI inputs*; support formats up to maximum
1920 × 1080@60 fps, including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 and 59.94 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1920 × 1080@30 and 29.97 Hz (1080p30)
• 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25)
• 1920 × 1080@24, and 23.97 Hz (1080p24)
• 1280 × 720@60, and 59.94 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 720 × 480@60, and 59.94 Hz (480p60)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60)
1280 × 1024@60, and 75 Hz (SXGA)
1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA)
800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, and 85 Hz (SVGA)
1920 × 1200@50 and 60 Hz (WUXGA)
1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
One DVI-I input
Analog (VGA or YPbPr); support formats up
to maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60),
including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p)
• 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p)
• 1280 × 1024@60 and 75 Hz (SXGA)
• 1280 × 960@60 Hz
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA)
• 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
• 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
• 1280 × 800@60 Hz (WXGA)
• 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
Digital (DVI-D); support formats up to maximum
1920 × 1080@60 fps, including:
• 1920 × 1080@60, 59.94 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1920 × 1080@30, 29.97 Hz (1080p30)
• 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25)
• 1920 × 1080@24, 23.97 Hz (1080p24)
• 1280 × 720@60, 59.94 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 720 × 480@60, 59.94 Hz (480p60)
• 640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60)
• 1280 × 1024@60, 75 Hz (SXGA)
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, 85 Hz (XGA)
• 800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, 85 Hz (SVGA)
• 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
• 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
• 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
One Composite/S-Video Input (BNC Connectors)
• PAL/NTSC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Systems with single camera: HDMI input 1 is used for
the camera
Systems with dual camera: HDMI inputs 1 and 2 are
used for the cameras
VIDEO OUTPUTS (THREE OUTPUTS)
Two HDMI outputs* and one DVI-I output; supports
formats up to maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps
(1080p60), including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
AUDIO STANDARDS
• 64 kbps and 128 kbps AAC-LD, G.722, G.722.1,
G.711, G.729AB
AUDIO FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
MX700 and MX800 Dual: HDMI outputs 1 and 2 are
used for the two integrated screens
MX800 Single: HDMI output 1 is used for the
integrated screen
VESA Monitor Power Management
• Eight microphones, 48 V phantom powered,
Euroblock connector, each with separate echo
cancellers and noise reduction; all microphones can
be set for balanced line level
• Four balanced line level inputs, Euroblock connector
• Three HDMI inputs, digital, stereo (from PC/DVD)
ENCODE/DECODE VIDEO FORMATS
232
High quality 20 kHz audio
Eight separate acoustic echo cancellers
Eight-port audio mixer
Automatic gain control (AGC)
Automatic noise reduction
Active lip synchronization
AUDIO INPUTS (FIFTEEN INPUTS)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
Supports encode/decode video formats up to
maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (HD1080p60),
including:
• 176 × 144@30 frames per second (fps) (QCIF)
• 352 × 288@30 fps (CIF)
• 512 × 288@30 fps (w288p)
• 576 × 448@30 fps (448p)
• 768 × 448@30 fps (w448p)
• 704 × 576@30 fps (4CIF)
• 1024 × 576@30 fps (w576p)
• 1280 × 720@30 fps (720p30)
• 1920 × 1080@30 fps (1080p30)
• 640 × 480@30 fps (VGA)
• 800 × 600@30 fps (SVGA)
• 1024 × 768@30 fps (XGA)
• 1280 × 1024@30 fps (SXGA)
• 1280 × 768@30 fps (WXGA)
1440 × 900@30 fps (WXGA+)
1680 × 1050@30 fps (WSXGA+)
512 × 288@60 fps (w288p60)
768 × 448@60 fps (w448p60)
1024 × 576@60 fps (w576p60)
1280 × 720@60 fps (720p60)
1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60)
AUDIO OUTPUTS (EIGHT OUTPUTS)
• Six balanced line level outputs, Euroblock connector
• Two HDMI outputs (MX700 and MX800 Dual: Both
HDMI audio outputs are used for the two integrated
screens. MX800 Single: One HDMI audio output is
used for the integrated screen)
DUAL STREAM
• H.239 dual stream (H.323)
• BFCP dual stream (SIP)
• Support for resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 30 fps,
independent of main stream resolution
*
HDMI version 1.4
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 4 of 4)
MULTIPOINT SUPPORT
• Five-way embedded SIP/H.323 MultiPoint, ref.
MultiSite
• Cisco Ad-Hoc Conferencing (requires Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM), and Cisco
Meeting Server (CMS) or Cisco TelePresence
Server with Cisco TelePresence Conductor)
• Cisco Conferencing Active Control
MULTISITE FEATURES
(EMBEDDED MULTIPOINT)
• Five-way 720p30, three-way and four-way
1080p30
• Full individual audio and video transcoding
• Individual layouts in MultiSite continuous presence
• H.323/SIP/VoIP in the same conference
• Support for Presentation (H.239/BFCP) from any
participant at resolutions up to 1080p15
• H.264, encryption and dual stream from any site
• IP downspeeding
• Dial in and dial out
• Conference rates up to 10 Mbps
PROTOCOLS
• H.323 and SIP (dual call stack support)
• ISDN (requires Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link)
IP NETWORK FEATURES
• DNS lookup for service configuration
• Differentiated services (QoS)
• IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
control)
• Auto gatekeeper discovery
• Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering
• H.245 DTMF tones in H.323
• RFC 4733 DTMF tones in SIP
• Date and time support via NTP
• Packet loss based downspeeding
• URI dialing
• TCP/IP
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
• IEEE 802.1x network authentication
• IEEE 802.1q VLAN
• IEEE 802.1p QoS and class of service
• ClearPath
IPV6 NETWORK SUPPORT
• Dual-stack IPv4 and IPv6 for DHCP, SSH, HTTP,
HTTPS, DNS and DiffServ
• Support for static IP address assignment, stateless
autoconfiguration and DHCPv6
CISCO UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER
(requires Cisco UCM version 8.6 or later)
• Native registration with Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM)
• Basic CUCM provisioning
• Firmware upgrade from CUCM
• Cisco Discovery Protocol and DHCP option 150
support
• Basic telephony features such as hold, resume,
transfer, and corporate directory lookup
SECURITY FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Management using HTTPS and SSH
IP administration password
Administration menu password
Disable IP services
Network settings protection
NETWORK INTERFACES
• One LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100/1000 Mbps
• Two LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) interfaces to be used for
Cisco TelePresence peripherals
OTHER INTERFACES
• Two USB host (one is in use; one is for future use)
• GPIO
EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION
• H.323 and SIP point-to-point and MultiSite
• Standards-based: H.235 v3 and Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES)
• Automatic key generation and exchange
• Supported in dual stream
All specifications are subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.
All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may differ.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other
countries. A listing of Cisco’s trademarks can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks
mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company.
April 2018
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
233
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Supported RFCs
The RFC (Request for Comments) series contains technical
and organizational documents about the Internet, including
the technical specifications and policy documents produced
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
CE software supports a range of RFCs, including the following:
•
RFC 2782 DNS RR for specifying the location of services
(DNS SRV)
•
RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
•
RFC 3263 Locating SIP Servers
•
RFC 3361 DHCP Option for SIP Servers
•
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time
Applications
•
RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
•
RFC 4091 The Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT)
Semantics for the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Grouping Framework
•
RFC 4092 Usage of the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT) Semantics in the
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
•
RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol
draft-ietf-bfcpbis-rfc4582bis-00 Revision of the Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP) for use over an unreliable transport
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
•
RFC 4733 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and
Telephony Signals
•
RFC 5245 Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE): A
Protocol for Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal for
Offer/Answer Protocols
•
RFC 5589: SIP Call Control Transfer
•
RFC 5766 Traversal Using Relays around NAT (TURN): Relay
Extensions to Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)
•
RFC 5905 Network Time Protocol Version 4: Protocol and
Algorithms Specification
234
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
User documentation on the Cisco web site
The documents are organized in the following categories - some documents are not available for all products:
Use the following short-links to find the documentation for
the product series running CE software.
Room Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/roomkit-docs
Install and Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides
•
Installation guides: How to install the product
•
Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to
get the system up and running
•
RCSI guide: Regulatory compliance and safety
information
MX Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
SX Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/sx-docs
Maintain and Operate > Maintain and Operate Guides
•
Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to
get the system up and running
•
Administrator guide: Information required to administer
your product
•
Deployment guide for TelePresence endpoints on
CUCM: Tasks to perform to start using the video system
with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(CUCM)
DX Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/dx-docs
•
In general, you can find user documentation for all Cisco
Collaboration endpoints at ► https://www.cisco.com/go/
telepresence/docs
Spare parts overview, Spare parts replacement guides,
Cable schemas: Useful information when replacing
spare parts
Maintain and Operate > End-User Guides
•
User guides: How to use the product
•
Quick reference guides: How to use the product
•
Physical interface guide: Details about the codec’s
physical interface, including the connector panel and
LEDs
Reference Guides > Command references
•
Reference Guides > Technical References
•
235
CAD drawings: 2D CAD drawings with measurements
Configure > Configuration Guides
•
CE Customization guide: How to customize the user
interface, how to use the video system’s API to program
in-room controls, making macros, use a video switch,
and configure advanced audio set-ups using the Audio
Console.
Design > Design Guides
•
Video conferencing room guidelines: General guidelines
for room design and best practice
•
Video conferencing room guidelines: Things to do to
improve the perceived audio quality
Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Licensing Information
•
Open source documentation: Licenses and notices for
open source software used in this product
Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Release Notes
•
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
API reference guides: Reference guide for the
Application Programmer Interface (API)
Software release notes
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Intellectual property rights
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS
MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,
INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE
ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION
OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING
PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH
THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU
ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,
CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a
program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s
public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright
© 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT
FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR
TRADE PRACTICE.
Cisco contacts
On our web site you will find an overview of the worldwide Cisco contacts.
Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/offices
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS
SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document
are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples,
command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included
in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual
IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Dr.
San Jose, CA 95134 USA
All printed copies and duplicate soft copies are considered un-Controlled copies
and the original on-line version should be referred to for latest version.
Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax
numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/
or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks,
go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned
are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not
imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Cisco product security overview
This product contains cryptographic features and is subject to United States and
local country laws governing import, export, transfer, and use. Delivery of Cisco
cryptographic products does not imply third-party authority to import, export,
distribute, or use encryption. Importers, exporters, distributors, and users are
responsible for compliance with U.S. and local country laws. By using this product
you agree to comply with applicable laws and regulations. If you are unable to
comply with U.S. and local laws, return this product immediately.
Further information regarding U.S. export regulations may be found at
http://www.bis.doc.gov/policiesandregulations/ear/index.htm.
D15331.13 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.5, SEPTEMBER 2018.
236
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project